Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

279
SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration PUBLIC Document Version: PPM 5.0 SP09 - October 2012

description

Config Guide SAP PPM

Transcript of Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

Page 1: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

PUBLIC

Document Version: PPM 5.0 SP09 - October 2012

Page 2: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

2 October 2012

Copyright© Copyright 2012 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

SAP Library document classification: PUBLIC

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Silverlight, and Visual Studio are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x,System z, System z10, z10, z/VM, z/OS, OS/390, zEnterprise, PowerVM, Power Architecture,Power Systems, POWER7, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER, PowerHA, pureScale, PowerPC,BladeCenter, System Storage, Storwize, XIV, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF,Redbooks, OS/2, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Tivoli, Informix, and Smarter Planet aretrademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and its affiliates.

UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc.

HTML, XML, XHTML, and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World WideWeb Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

Apple, App Store, iBooks, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Multi-Touch, Objective-C, Retina,Safari, Siri, and Xcode are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Page 3: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 3

IOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems Inc.

RIM, BlackBerry, BBM, BlackBerry Curve, BlackBerry Bold, BlackBerry Pearl, BlackBerry Torch,BlackBerry Storm, BlackBerry Storm2, BlackBerry PlayBook, and BlackBerry App World aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Research in Motion Limited.

Google App Engine, Google Apps, Google Checkout, Google Data API, Google Maps, GoogleMobile Ads, Google Mobile Updater, Google Mobile, Google Store, Google Sync, GoogleUpdater, Google Voice, Google Mail, Gmail, YouTube, Dalvik and Android are trademarks orregistered trademarks of Google Inc.

INTERMEC is a registered trademark of Intermec Technologies Corporation.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.

Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC.

Computop is a registered trademark of Computop Wirtschaftsinformatik GmbH.

SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer,StreamWork, SAP HANA, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as theirrespective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and othercountries.

Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, CrystalDecisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and servicesmentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks ofBusiness Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company.

Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybaseproducts and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks orregistered trademarks of Sybase Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.

Crossgate, m@gic EDDY, B2B 360°, and B2B 360° Services are registered trademarks ofCrossgate AG in Germany and other countries. Crossgate is an SAP company.

All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National productspecifications may vary.

Page 4: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

4 October 2012

These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AGand its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representationor warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect tothe materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are setforth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any.Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

Page 5: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 5

Icons in Body TextIcon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance. For more information, see Help on Help General Information Classesand Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of any version ofSAP Library.

Typographic ConventionsType Style Description

Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include fieldnames, screen titles, pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths,and menu options.

Cross-references to other documentation.

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, graphic titles, and tabletitles.

EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects. These include report names,program names, transaction codes, table names, and key concepts ofa programming language when they are surrounded by body text, forexample, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and theirpaths, messages, names of variables and parameters, source text,and names of installation, upgrade and database tools.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem.

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard, for example, F2 or ENTER.

Page 6: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

6 October 2012

Table of Contents

Portfolio Management: Configuration ......................................................................................... 11

SAP Notes ............................................................................................................................. 13

General Settings .................................................................................................................... 14

Usage Types, Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on ............................................ 15

Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management....................................................... 17

Activating Services ............................................................................................................. 19

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases .................................................................... 22

Configuring the Call Up of the Online Help (SAP Library) .................................................... 23

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) .................................................. 26

Creating Roles for Portfolio-Specific Authorization Checks .................................................. 28

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles ............................................................................... 31

Activating Change Documents (Portf. Mgmt)....................................................................... 33

Document Management with Knowledge Provider (Portf. Mgmt) ......................................... 35

Document Management with KM ........................................................................................ 36

Creating/Changing the Status for Portfolio Objects ............................................................. 37

Activating Workflow ............................................................................................................ 39

Making Settings for the Graphical View ............................................................................... 41

Making Global Enhancements to Portfolio Objects .............................................................. 42

Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV) ........................................................... 44

Making Settings for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer ............................................................ 46

Definition of Security Lists for OfficeControls....................................................................... 49

Activating HTTP-Based Document Management ................................................................ 50

System Connections .............................................................................................................. 51

Making Settings for Integration with Enterprise Portal ......................................................... 52

Preparing the Integration with Collaboration Rooms (Portf. Mgmt)....................................... 54

Making Settings for Microsoft Project Integration................................................................. 56

Defining Integration with Project System (PS) ..................................................................... 57

Setting Up ALE between SAP Portf. and Proj. Mgmt and FI/CO .......................................... 58

Preparing Object Links to Other Systems............................................................................ 59

Object Navigator Integration for Material and Recipe .......................................................... 60

Ensuring Logon Without the Logon Screen (Portf. Mgmt) .................................................... 62

Identity Management .......................................................................................................... 63

Business Customizing ............................................................................................................ 65

Portfolio Management ........................................................................................................ 66

Page 7: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 7

Defining Settings for the Portfolio Structure ..................................................................... 67

Defining Settings for Initiative Management ..................................................................... 68

Preparing Printing ........................................................................................................... 70

Setting Up Object Links (Portf. Mgmt) ............................................................................. 71

Setting Up the BW Interface ............................................................................................ 74

Configuring Navigation (Portf. Mgmt) ............................................................................... 75

Setting Up Field Configuration ......................................................................................... 79

Defining Settings for Assigning Objects ........................................................................... 82

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a Proj. Mgmt Project ................................... 83

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a PS Project................................................ 85

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to an Initiative ................................................. 87

Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management ............................................................ 88

Scenario A) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Proj. Mgmt Project.................................... 90

Scenario B) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Initiative ................................................... 96

Scenario C) Synchronize Portfolio Item and PS Project.............................................. 100

Metrics Management with Portfolio Management .......................................................... 104

Financial and Capacity Planning ................................................................................... 107

Defining Settings for Assigning a Resource to a Bucket ................................................. 111

Defining Settings for Fiscal Year Planning ..................................................................... 112

Defining Settings for Transfer to SAP ERP .................................................................... 114

Defining Search Help for Portfolio Management ............................................................ 115

Resource Management ........................................................................................................ 116

Distributed Content Server ................................................................................................... 117

Customizing the Content Server in the Project Management WAS .................................... 118

Changing the Content Server Configuration ...................................................................... 119

Current Settings ................................................................................................................... 120

Generating SAP Load ....................................................................................................... 121

Granting Administration Authorization for an Object .......................................................... 122

Project Management: Configuration ......................................................................................... 124

SAP Notes ........................................................................................................................... 126

General Settings .................................................................................................................. 127

Usage Types, Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on .......................................... 128

Determining the URL for Calling Project Management ...................................................... 130

Activating Services ........................................................................................................... 132

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases .................................................................. 134

URL Customizing ............................................................................................................. 135

Page 8: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

8 October 2012

Configuring the Call Up of the Online Help (SAP Library) .................................................. 136

Setting Up Business Partners ........................................................................................... 139

Replacement of User or Resource .................................................................................... 140

Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) .................................................. 141

Creating Roles for Project-Specific Authorization Checks .................................................. 143

Entering Default Values for User-Specific Settings ............................................................ 146

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles ............................................................................. 147

Activating Change Documents .......................................................................................... 149

Document Management with Knowledge Provider ............................................................ 150

Creating/Changing the Status Profile for Project Elements ................................................ 151

Activating Workflow for Change Documents...................................................................... 152

Activating Workflow for Status Administration ................................................................... 154

Making Settings for Alerts ................................................................................................. 155

Making Settings for Searching with TREX ......................................................................... 157

Making Settings for the Graphical View ............................................................................. 158

Making Global Enhancements to Project Elements ........................................................... 159

Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV) for Resource Management ............... 161

Making Settings to Display Resource Management-Related Views ................................... 163

Making Settings for Message Mapping ............................................................................. 164

Definition of Security Lists for OfficeControls..................................................................... 165

Activating HTTP-Based Document Management .............................................................. 166

Making Settings for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer .......................................................... 167

System Connections ............................................................................................................ 170

Preparing Integration with cFolders ................................................................................... 171

Making Settings for Integration with Enterprise Portal ....................................................... 174

Preparing the Integration with Collaboration Rooms .......................................................... 176

Configuring Integration with Document Management (DMS) ............................................. 179

Preparing Integration with Supplier Relationship Management .......................................... 182

Making Settings for Portfolio Management Integration ...................................................... 184

Making Settings for SAP Product Definition Integration ..................................................... 185

Making Settings for Microsoft Project Integration............................................................... 186

Preparing Object Links to Other Systems.......................................................................... 187

Object Navigator Integration for Material and Recipe ........................................................ 188

Preparing Integration with Cross-Application Time Sheets ................................................ 190

Ensuring Logon Without the Logon Screen ....................................................................... 192

Connecting Workforce Deployment ................................................................................... 193

Identity Management ........................................................................................................ 194

Page 9: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 9

Data Replication .................................................................................................................. 196

Setting Up Project Management with HCM in SAP PLM.................................................... 197

Defining Inbound Processing......................................................................................... 198

Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE to Project Management ......................... 199

Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management ............................. 201

Setting Up HCM Master Data for Conversion to Project Management ............................ 204

Preparing Data Replication for WFD .............................................................................. 205

Setting Up Project Management with HCM in SAP ERP.................................................... 206

Business Customizing .......................................................................................................... 209

Project Management ........................................................................................................ 210

Defining Time Units ....................................................................................................... 211

Defining Settings for the Project Structure ..................................................................... 212

Defining Roles .............................................................................................................. 214

Preparing Printing ......................................................................................................... 215

Preparing the Creation of Project Status Reports .......................................................... 217

Specifying Display Details for Business Partners ........................................................... 218

Making Settings for Sending E-Mails and Groupware .................................................... 219

Making Settings for the Control Plan ............................................................................. 220

Defining Evaluations ..................................................................................................... 221

Setting Up Object Links ................................................................................................. 222

Setting Up the BW Interface .......................................................................................... 226

Defining Settings for Accounting Integration .................................................................. 227

Making Settings for Approvals ....................................................................................... 230

Creating Candidate Managers and Staffing Managers ................................................... 231

Creating Candidate and Staffing Manager Entries for SAP CRM ................................... 232

Making Settings for Version Management ..................................................................... 234

Setting Up Field Control ................................................................................................ 236

Customizing Forecast Dates ......................................................................................... 240

Activating Project Charters ............................................................................................ 241

Configuring Navigation .................................................................................................. 242

Defining Search Help for Project Management .............................................................. 243

Workforce Deployment ..................................................................................................... 244

Dispatcher Settings ....................................................................................................... 245

Making Settings for BW Evaluations .............................................................................. 246

Resource Settings for WFD Server................................................................................ 247

Activating the Qualification Search and Matchup Using WFM Core................................ 248

Specifying Calculations for the Suitability Rate of a Resource ........................................ 249

Page 10: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

10 October 2012

Configuring Groupware Integration ................................................................................... 250

Setting Up and Checking the MapStore for WFM-GWI .................................................. 252

CRM Middleware Customizing ...................................................................................... 255

RFC Destinations .......................................................................................................... 257

WFM Core Customizing ................................................................................................ 258

Completing WFD IMG Customizing ............................................................................... 260

Loading Initial WFM Assignments to Groupware ........................................................... 262

Distributed Content Server................................................................................................ 263

Customizing the Content Server in the Project Management WAS ................................ 264

Changing the Content Server Configuration .................................................................. 265

Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data ........................................................................ 266

Creating an Organizational Structure ................................................................................ 267

Creating a Business Partner ............................................................................................. 268

Creating Service Arrangements for a Business Partner ..................................................... 269

Transferring Availability Data of Business Partners ........................................................... 270

Buffering Availability Data of Business Partners ................................................................ 271

Defining Qualifications ...................................................................................................... 272

Current Settings ................................................................................................................... 273

Generating SAP Load ....................................................................................................... 274

Extracting Evaluations for a Project .................................................................................. 275

Granting Administration Authorization for an Object .......................................................... 276

Replicating Data for Accounting Integration ...................................................................... 278

Archiving .......................................................................................................................... 279

Page 11: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 11

Portfolio Management: ConfigurationBusiness ScenarioThis business scenario configuration guide is valid for the business scenario PortfolioManagement with the corresponding release of the associated SAP application components.

Business Scenario and SAP Application Components

BusinessScenario SAP Application Component with Minimum Release

PortfolioManagement

Portfolio and Project Management 5.0

PPM_KM (only if KM documents are used)

SAP ERP

SAP BI

For more information (including the minimum release), see the MasterGuide for SAP Portfolio and Project Management on SAP ServiceMarketplace at http://service.sap.com/plm-inst under UsingSAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0.

ContentThis business scenario configuration guide tells you everything you need to do to successfullyimplement the business scenario. The guide explains the sequence of the individual configurationactivities and how these activities are interdependent.

You can find information about the following:

Making general settings

Connecting the systems

Data replication

Business Customizing

Setting up the component-specific master data

Regular settings in production operation

Unless specified otherwise, make the settings described in this section on SAP EHP2 for SAPNetWeaver 7.0, on which SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 is based.

This document describes the Portfolio Management configuration within SAP Portfolioand Project Management 5.0 and the configuration of SAP ERP. No special settings arerequired in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse in the BI system.

Page 12: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

12 October 2012

Target Group Technical consultants

Application consultants

Members of project teams involved in implementing an SAP solution

SAP customer IT department

The section on System Connections [Page 51] is aimed at technical consultants, while thesections on Business Customizing [Page 65] is aimed at application consultants. All othersections are of interest to both consultant groups. The relevancy of the sections for the othertarget groups depends on the tasks of the individual groups.

Business Scenario Configuration Guide FeedbackWe would like to keep improving our business scenario configuration guide and are thereforeinterested in your feedback. If you find any errors in the configuration guide, create a messageunder the Portfolio Management (PPM-PFM) component on SAP Service Marketplace athttp://service.sap.com/messages.

Page 13: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 13

SAP NotesBefore you start configuration, read the following SAP Notes:

SAP Note Number Title

1377080 PPM 5.0: Overview of notes

1377104 FAQs: SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0

1377082 PPM 5.0: Support package information and notes

1399319 Portfolio Management: Customers UIs

1402804 Support Packages for CPRXRPM 500_702

1402912 PPM 5.0: Supported Browsers

1406590 Configuration of KM

1406659 Upload Items/Initiative to Portfolio Management

You can find all SAP Notes on the SAP Service Marketplace athttp://service.sap.com/notes.

Page 14: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

14 October 2012

General SettingsThis section contains general information that you need to start the business scenarioconfiguration.

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed, using the SAP solution master guides, and the SAPcomponent and business scenario installation and upgrade guides. You are familiar with therelevant SAP Notes about installation, configuration, and upgrading.

ProcessPerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 15: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 15

Usage Types, Supported Browsers, Java Versions,and so onAs of SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0, the following usage types are supported:

Usage Type Client/Browser Rendering Roles and

Navigation AreaSAP Portfolio andProject ManagementApplication/ Coding

Enterprise Portal Browser (IE/ Firefox HTML PCD role in

Enterprise Portal ABAP back-end system

NetWeaverBusiness Client forHTML (NWBC forHTML)

Browser (IE/ Firefox) HTML

PFCG role inABAP back-endsystem

ABAP back-end system

NetWeaverBusiness Client forDesktop (NWBCfor Desktop)

NWBC forDesktop

HTMLPFCG role inABAP back-endsystem

ABAP back-end system

HTML PCD role inEnterprise Portal ABAP back-end system

ProcedureThere are two different ways of using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal to call SAP Portfolio and Project Management. For theintegration of SAP Portfolio and Project Management with Enterprise Portal, see Making Settingsfor Integration with Enterprise Portal [Page 52] (Portf. Mgmt) and Making Settings for Integrationwith Enterprise Portal. The portal role (PCD role) content delivered with the business package forSAP Portfolio and Project Management defines the navigation area (worksets) and menu entries(in the portal navigation area on the left) that a user sees in Enterprise Portal.

Without Enterprise PortalIn case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, you call theapplication in the browser using the URL for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, seeDetermining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [Page 17] and Determining the URL forCalling Project Management. You must assign the users to the PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM,which provides the navigation area and menus

(see Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]).

Page 16: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

16 October 2012

For both cases (with or without Enterprise Portal)For more information, see:

Portfolio Management

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [Page 26]

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22]

Project Management

Activating Single Roles for Project Activating Single Roles for Project Management(PFCG)

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

URL Customizing

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

See also SAP Note 1402912 for detailed information about:

Supported browsers / clients

Recommended browser settings

Supported Java runtime versions (on client side)

Supported MS Project versions for import/export

See also the Release Notes for SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0.

Page 17: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 17

Determining the URL for Calling PortfolioManagementPrerequisitesConfigure the HTTP server (protocol and port). For more information, see Setting Up the HTTPServer (Protocol and Port).

In case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, the users musthave been assigned the PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM, which provides the navigation menus. Formore information, see Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [Page 26] andDefining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31].

ProcedureThere are two different options for using SAP Portfolio and Project Management:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal. For integration of SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement with Enterprise Portal, see Making Settings for Integration with Enterprise Portal[Page 52] (Portf. Mgmt).

Without Enterprise PortalYou call the Portfolio Management application in the browser using a URL that is structured asfollows:

<Protocol>://<Host>.<Domain>.<Extension>:<Port>/sap/bc/nwbc/

The following table shows you how the parameters should be filled:

URLParameter What You Should Know

Protocol Protocol: http or https

Host Name of the application server on which the application is to be executed.

Domain withthe extension

Different PCs under a joint name. The domain can consist of a single host or anetwork.

Port

Can be left out if the default port 80 (http) is used for http or the default port 443(https) is used for HTTPS. You define the settings for the ports in the instanceprofile of the system using the parameter icm/server_port_0 oricm/server_port_1. You can also view them in the ICM Monitor:

1. In the SAP Menu, choose Tools Administration MonitorSystem Monitoring Internet Communication Manager .

Page 18: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

18 October 2012

URLParameter What You Should Know

2. Choose Goto Parameters Display .

If you do not want to log on to the SAP NetWeaver system using the client that is set as thedefault in the system (see transaction RZ10), you must include the client you want to use as aURL parameter. The corresponding URL parameter is called sap-client. For the logon to theclient 100, for example, the URL is structured as follows:

<Protocol>://<Host>.<Domain>.<Extension>:<Port>/sap/bc/nwbc/?sap-client=100

For a list of the supported browsers and clients, see Usage Types, Supported Browsers,Java Versions, and so on [Page 15].

For more information about system-specific URL parameters (for example, logon language), seethe documentation for SAP NetWeaver.

Page 19: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 19

Activating ServicesOnce you have installed the Application Server ABAP (AS ABAP), all Internet CommunicationFramework (ICF) services are available (in an inactive state for security reasons). To call theapplication Portfolio Management, the following HTTP services must be activated in the HTTPservice tree (transaction SICF). The complete path from the service to the root of the tree(default_host) must be active.

If you upgrade or implement a Support Package, the services may be deactivated. Therefore,check whether the services are still active after you upgrade or implement a Support Package.

General Basis ServicesYou can find the basis services that you must activate in SAP Note 517484.

Portfolio Management-Specific Services /default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_bucket_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_decision_points_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_initiative_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_initiative_t_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_item_dependency

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_item_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_item_temp_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_portfolio_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/RPM_QNNR_DETAILS

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_review_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/RPM_SMODEL_SCORE_BOARD

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/RPM_USER_SETTING

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/rpm_whatif_scenario

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/classification_dash

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/document_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/document_t

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/fin_cap_planning

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/item_dependency

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/km_doc_integration

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/obj_link_dashboard

Page 20: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

20 October 2012

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/port_structure_chart

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/qnnr_dashboard

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/res_mng_details

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/transfer_demand

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/ui_changedoc_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/multiple_update

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/substitute

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/version_header

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/wda_dashboard_cust

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_dfm_links

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_m_metrics_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_resource_bp_detail_create

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_team

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_workcenter_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_resource_pool_fpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_resource_detail

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_timeline_mon_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_kfm_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/inm_kfm_sel_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/res_workcenter_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/ui_res_dashboard

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/print_fact_sheet

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/rpm/ui_factsheet_app

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/RPM_COLLECTION_DETAILS

/default_host/sap/public/PPM*

To activate a service, open the path and choose either Service or Virt from the main menuand then select Host Activate or Host Activate Service in the context menu.

Page 21: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 21

ProcedureDefining an AliasBy defining an alias in the HTTP service tree (transaction SICF), you can call the applicationusing a shorter, mnemonic URL in which you can, for example, specify the client for the logon.Note that in this case the alias target element cannot contain the target node nwbc. At most it cancontain the path /default_host/sap/bc/. You can then call the application using/alias/nwbc.

For more information about activating services in SICF, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver onSAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com.

Page 22: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

22 October 2012

SM59 Destinations and Portal System AliasesThere are two different options for using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalDefine the aliases listed below in the Enterprise Portal as system aliases for back-end systems.

Without Enterprise PortalDefine the aliases listed below as SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) in the SAP Portfolio andProject Management (back-end) system.

ProcedureThe following system aliases (in Enterprise Portal) and SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) inthe SAP Portfolio and Project Management (backend) system have to be defined:

SAP_cProjects and SAP_RPM:

Both should point to the SAP Portfolio and Project Management back-end system itself.

SAP_BS_FND (needed only in Enterprise Portal):

This should point to the SAP Portfolio and Project Management back-end system itself.

SAP_BW (optional):

This should point to the (optional) BI system. Needed for the Reports pages whichprovide links to BI Web reports.

For HTTPS, maintain the following SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) in the SAP Portfolio andProject Management (back-end) system in addition to the ones listed above (both should point tothe SAP Portfolio and Project Management backend system itself):

SAP_CPROJECTS_HTTPS

SAP_RPM_HTTPS

For these two SM59 destinations, maintain the Logon & Security tab under Security Options andset SSL to Active.

Page 23: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 23

Configuring the Call Up of the Online Help (SAPLibrary)SAP Portfolio and Project Management supports the following online help (SAP Library) variants:

PlainHtmlHttp

The help files are installed on a Web server.

PlainHtmlFile

The help files are installed in a directory on a file server, which facilitates general access.

DynamicHelp

The files are accessed via the Knowledge Warehouse Server.

For more information about connecting the online help, see the readme.txt in the documentationpackage for SAP Portfolio and Project Management that you have downloaded from SAP ServiceMarketplace at http://service.sap.com/swdc.

PrerequisitesYou have ensured that no entries have been selected in the HLPRESOL table. You haveselected the entry OTHER_RELEASE in the IWBSETTING table, or you have created the entry ifit did not yet exist. For more information, see SAP Note 684431.

ProcedureInstallation of the Online Help for the Variants PlainHtmlHttp andPlainHtmlFile

1. First, create a directory in the file system of your Web server or file server (for example,<Drive>:/SAPHelp/PlainHTML/helpdata). This directory will be the root directory of thehelp installation.

2. In this root directory, create an additional directory for every language version that youwant to install and name these directories with the relevant language abbreviation, forexample, DE for German and EN for English documentation.

If you have already installed the online help for the Web Application Server(WAS) 7.00 as a PlainHtmlHttp or PlainHtmlFile variant, you do not have tocreate any new directories on the Web server or the file server. You can then usethe existing directory structure of this installation. You can ignore any warningmessages (that say you could be overwriting existing files) that arise when youare copying help files to the directory structure later on.

You can find the files you require in the document package you download for SAPPortfolio and Project Management in the corresponding language directory in theplainhtml directory.

Page 24: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

24 October 2012

3. Copy the files to the corresponding language directory in the root directory of the helpinstallation.

4. Create a virtual directory on your Web server or file server, or release a directory and linkthis directory to the root directory of the help installation in the file system. For moreinformation, see the help for your Web server or file server.

The root directory of the help installation can now be viewed under the name that youassigned to the virtual directory or the released directory (for example, saphelp).

Installation of the Online Help for the DynamicHelp VariantThe files to help you install the online help on a Knowledge Warehouse Server are located in thedocument package you download for SAP Portfolio and Project Management in thecorresponding language directory in the htmlhelp directory. For more information aboutinstallation, see the Import of SAP KW Contents section in the following documents on SAPService Marketplace:

For Release 6.0 at service.sap.com/instguides under SAP ComponentsGuides for SAP Knowledge Warehouse Release 6.0 SAP Knowledge Warehouse

6.0 Installation Guide .

For Release 7.0 at service.sap.com/instguides under SAP NetWeaver SAPNetWeaver 2004 Installation SAP KW Configuration Guide SAP KnowledgeWarehouse 7.0 .

Configuration in SAP Netweaver 7.0Enter the following information in Customizing under General Settings Setting Variants forHelp (SAP Library) on the tab page of the documentation variant you want to install:

Column Entry

Variant You can choose a description but it must be a unique description, for example,PPM_Docu_DE (for the German help) or PPM_Docu_EN (for the English help).

Platform NONE

Area IWBHELP (Documentation)

Server

For PlainHtmlHttp: Name of the Web server, and if necessary, include thedomain and port of the server (this is only necessary if the port is not thedefault Http port 80).

For PlainHtmlFile: Not relevant

For DynamicHelp: This is copied from the configuration of the KnowledgeWarehouse Server.

Path

For PlainHtmlHttp: Name of the virtual directory that is linked to the rootdirectory of the help installation on the Web server (for example,saphelp).

For PlainHtmlFile: Name of the released directory on the file serverincluding the server name under which the root directory of the

Page 25: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 25

Column Entry

documentation installation on the Web server is visible (for example,<server>/saphelp).

For DynamicHelp: Not relevant

Language Help language

Default Determines whether or not the language is the default language.

See also:

For more information, see the Installation Guide for SAP Library on SAP Service Marketplace atservice.sap.com/instguides under SAP Library.

Page 26: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

26 October 2012

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management(PFCG)Composite roles contain several single roles. The following single roles are available as standard:

SAP_XRPM_USER

SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR

SAP_RPM_BCV_USER

SAP_BPR_PPM

For BCV use, the composite role SAP_RPM_BCV_USER_COMP is also available.

SAP_XRPM_USER should be assigned to all users.

SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR should be assigned to portfolio administrators whoshould have for example the authority to create portfolios and to maintain all portfolioobjects.

If Enterprise Portal is not used, then the role SAP_BPR_PPM provides the navigationmenu definition for SAP NetWeaver Business Client. SAP_BPR_PPM must thereforebe assigned to every user when SAP NetWeaver Business Client for HTML or SAPNetWeaver Business Client for Desktop is used (without using Enterprise Portal).See also Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [Page 17]. Thecomposite role assigned to a user determines the initial views (that is, the navigationarea) the user sees in SAP Portfolio and Project Management when Enterprise Portalis not used (see Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]).

For details about the roles SAP_RPM_BCV_USER_COMP andSAP_RPM_BCV_USER, see Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV).

The authorization profiles for the single roles are not generated during shipment. The single rolesare not activated for use in Portfolio Management until they have been generated. Use thefollowing procedure to generate single roles.

Procedure1. Call transaction SUPC.

2. Select Roles with Non-Up-to-Date Profiles.

3. Enter SAP_*RPM* in the Role field.

4. Select Generate Automatically.

5. Choose (Execute).

Page 27: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 27

ResultAn authorization profile is generated for each single role. You can now use the transaction SU01to assign composite roles to the users or transaction PFCG to enter users for the roles (seeCreate New Composite Role in Creating Roles for Portfolio-Specific Authorization Checks [Page28]).

You may have to perform a user master comparison in transaction PFCG (see CreateNew Composite Role in Creating Roles for Portfolio-Specific Authorization Checks [Page28]).

You must transport the single and composite roles to all the clients for which you want touse Portfolio Management. You also have to perform a user master comparison after thetransport. Also take note of the dialog box that appears when you start the transport.

Depending on requirements, you can define new roles in the following procedure, Creating Rolesfor Portfolio-Specific Authorization Checks [Page 28].

Page 28: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

28 October 2012

Creating Roles for Portfolio-Specific AuthorizationChecksYou can also use the roles from the SAP authorization check within Portfolio Management for theauthorization check (see Authorizations in the documentation of Portfolio Management

Common Functions Authorizations ). This gives you the option of granting readauthorization to all Portfolio Management users in a portfolio object by entering the SAP roleSAP_XRPM_USER as the role on the Authorizations tab page in Project Management.

The SAP role SAP_XRPM_USER serves as a general authorization to allow a user to usePortfolio Management. This authorization does not, however, authorize the user to perform anyactivities in a particular portfolio object. To do this, users need portfolio object-specificauthorizations. You can distribute the portfolio object-specific authorizations to the users eitherdirectly or through their assignment to a role.

Numerous roles are delivered with the SAP system. However, the system allows a user to use arole for the assignment of portfolio object authorization only if the user is authorized to display thisrole. The search only displays these roles.

If the single role SAP_XRPM_USER should be used to define portfolio object-specificauthorizations store the Display authorization for role SAP_XRPM_USER in the authorizationobject S_USER_AGR (Authorizations: Check for Roles) in the role SAP_XRPM_USER. Thisallows users to use this role in Portfolio Management to assign a portfolio object-specificauthorization.

In addition to the standard roles, you can also use this procedure to create your own single andcomposite roles. If you want to use these roles in the portfolio object-specific authorizationchecks, you must first make the new roles accessible to Portfolio Management users. You do thisby storing the Display authorization for your own roles in the authorization object S_USER_AGRin the role SAP_XRPM_USER (see Making New Roles Available in Portfolio Managementbelow).

ProcedureCreating a New Single Role

1. In the SAP Menu of the Portfolio Management system, open role maintenance bychoosing Tools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles

, or by using the transaction PFCG.

2. Under Roles, enter a name and choose Create Role.

Ensure that the name that you specify is within the customer namespace.

3. Enter a Name and save the new role.

4. Select the User tab page.

5. Enter the users that you want to assign to the role.

6. Save your changes.

Page 29: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 29

7. On the User tab page, check if User comparison is flagged with a red traffic light. If it is,choose User comparison.

Through the user adjustment of the composite role, all the roles that belong to thecomposite role are adjusted. After this comparison, the user data in the user masterrecord is updated.

8. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

Creating a New Composite Role1. In the SAP Menu of the Portfolio Management system, open role maintenance by

choosing Tools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles, or by using the transaction PFCG.

2. Under Roles, enter a name and choose Create Comp. Role.

Ensure that the name that you specify is within the customer namespace.

3. Enter a Name and save the new role.

4. Select the Roles tab page.

5. Assign existing single roles to the composite role.

6. Select the User tab page.

7. Enter the users that you want to assign to the role.

8. Save your changes.

9. On the User tab page, check whether or not User comparison is flagged with a red trafficlight. If it is, choose User comparison.

Through the user adjustment of the composite role, all the roles that belong to thecomposite role are adjusted. After this comparison, the user data in the user masterrecord is updated.

10. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

Making New Roles Available in Portfolio Management1. In the SAP Menu of the Portfolio Management system, open role maintenance by

choosing Tools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles, or by using the transaction PFCG.

2. Under Role, enter the standard single role SAP_XRPM_USER and choose (ChangeRole).

3. Open the Authorizations tab page and choose (Change Authorization Data).

4. Expand the entry Basis: Administration and then Authorizations: Role Check andchoose (Change) beside Role Name.

Page 30: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

30 October 2012

A popup appears which contains all of the previously-entered roles for the authorizationobject.

5. Enter the new single and composite roles that you have created and want to use inPortfolio Management in this table.

6. Save your entries.

7. Choose (Generate) to create the authorization profile.

The authorization profile groups together several single authorizations or additionalauthorization profiles and then is entered in the user master record. This means that all ofthe authorizations contained in this profile will be assigned to the user.

8. On the User tab page, check if User comparison is flagged with a red traffic light. If it is,choose User comparison.

After the user comparison has been executed, the generated profile will be entered in theuser master record.

9. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

ResultYou have created new single or composite roles and activated them. The roles are now availablein Portfolio Management. A user can display these roles in Portfolio Management and assignauthorizations to them. All users that are assigned to these roles have the authorizations thatwere assigned to the roles in Portfolio Management.

Page 31: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 31

Defining the Navigation Area for RolesThere are two different ways of using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal to call SAP Portfolio and Project Management. For theintegration of SAP Portfolio and Project Management with Enterprise Portal, see Making Settingsfor Integration with Enterprise Portal [Page 52] (Portf. Mgmt) and Making Settings for Integrationwith Enterprise Portal. The portal role (PCD role) content delivered with the business package forSAP Portfolio and Project Management defines the navigation area (worksets) and menu entries(in the portal navigation area on the left) that a user sees in Enterprise Portal.

Without Enterprise PortalIn case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, you call theapplication in the browser using the URL for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, seeDetermining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [Page 17] and Determining the URL forCalling Project Management. You must assign the users to the PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM,which provides the navigation area and menus

(see Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]).

ProcedureWith Enterprise PortalTo change and adapt the worksets, pages, iViews, and so on, assigned to a portal role (PCDrole), the portal content delivered with the business package for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0 should be copied and adapted accordingly. For more information, see the SAPEnterprise Portal Content Administration Guide and the documentation for the Business Packagefor SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0. Make sure the navigation area defined for accessusing Enterprise Portal and the PFCG role defined authorizations of the users for the back-endare aligned and fit together.

Without Enterprise PortalThe PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM provides the navigation area delivered in the standard. Tochange and adapt the navigation area, this PFCG role should be copied and adapted accordingly.In order to change the navigation area defined by a PFCG role, go to transaction PFCG (RoleMaintenance), edit the PFCG role which should be changed, switch to tab Menu, and adapt themenu structure according to your needs. For more information see the SAP NetWeaver BusinessClient documentation (including Guides), and the documentation for transaction PFCG.

For Both Cases (With or Without Enterprise Portal)The Reports page available in the standard navigation area provides links to BI Web reports. Thisis dependent to the optional usage of BI. If you want to use the Reports pages, it is required thatthe SM59 destination SAP_BW (back-end) or the system alias SAP_BW (portal) has beendefined (see SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22] for more information).

Page 32: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

32 October 2012

For more information, see:

Portfolio Management

Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [Page 26]

Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [Page 17]

Project Management

Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) [External]

Determining the URL for Calling Project Management [External]

URL Customizing [External]

Making Settings for the Control Plan [External]

The entry Control Plans under Project Management is invisible by default.

Page 33: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 33

Activating Change Documents (Portf. Mgmt)In Portfolio Management, a change document function is available for the following objects:

Portfolio

Bucket

Initiative

Item

Decision Point

Review

Collection

What-If Scenario

Financial and capacity planning values

The system does not record changes to the following objects:

Long texts

Comments/notes

Documents

In the standard delivery, the function is deactivated for these objects.

ProcedureActivating Change Documents for Portfolio Management Objects in General

1. You can activate this function in Customizing for Portfolio Management under GlobalCustomizing Process and Service Settings Activate Change Document . For moreinformation, see the documentation in this Customizing activity.

2. Select the Display Change Documents indicator in the personal user settings (which youcall as a service).

Activating Change Documents for Financial and Capacity Planning Values1. In Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing Global Settings

Override Default Global Settings make the following entry:

Area SettingName

Description SettingValue

0002 0014 Change Documents for Financial and Capacity Planning X

2. In Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing Portfolio-Dependent Settings Define Financial Capacity Settings for Portfolio Types , specify

Page 34: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

34 October 2012

the financial and capacity planning values for which change documents are to be createdwithin a particular portfolio type. Use the Activate Change Documents for FinancialPlanning and Activate Change Documents for Capacity Planning views.For more information, see the documentation for this Customizing activity.

3. Select the Display Change Documents indicator in the personal user settings (which youcall as a service).

Page 35: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 35

Document Management with Knowledge Provider(Portf. Mgmt)You can use Knowledge Provider (KPro) for Document Management if you want to use the sameDocument Management as Project Management. To do so, you must create a status profile fordocuments.

ProcedureThe following document categories are available in Portfolio Management:

0_SAP-DOC (SAP Standard Document)

If you want to use statuses for documents in Portfolio Management, you have to createthe standard status profile for documents in the Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Create Status Profile for Documents .

Do not create any other status profiles – the system does not take these into account(see also SAP Note 731417).

Do not change any data in the status profile you created.

0_SAP-FLD (SAP Standard Folder)

You do not have to make any additional settings for folders.

Page 36: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

36 October 2012

Document Management with KMYou can use Knowledge Management (KM) for Document Management, for example, if you wantto have a central document management in which you store documents from several processes.

PrerequisitesDefine used Document ManagementIn Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, under Portfolio Management

Global Customizing Global Settings Override Global Settings , set the value in the 0007General Default Values area under 0022 – Document Alignment as follows:

For KM to be used as the standard document management, the value for the field mustbe blank.

For KPRO to be used as the standard document management, the field must have valueX.

Deactivate SAP RPM 4.5 KM IntegrationOpen in System Administration of the Enterprise Portal under System Configuration

Knowledge Management Content Management Repository Filtercom.sap.pct.cprxrpm.XRPMRepositoryFilter . Make sure that it is in deactivated mode. If it is

not, then deactivate it and restart the system.

Procedure1. In transaction SOAMANAGER, create a logical port with the name RPMKM for the

consumer proxy class /RPM/CO_REPOSITORY_FRAMEWORK_W. To do this, chooseApplication and Scenario Communication Single Service Administration . In the

Search By field, select Consumer Proxy; in the Search Pattern field, enter/RPM/CO_REPOSITORY_FRAMEWORK_W; and in the Field field, select Internal Name.Choose Go. Select the entry found and choose Apply Selection. Choose Configurations,and then choose Create Logical Port to create a logical port.

Make sure that you use the authentication setting User ID / Password to log on tothe KM portal with a user that has content administrator rights.

2. In transaction SOAMANAGER, you create a logical port with the name RPMKMPER for theconsumer proxy class /RPM/CO_PPMKMPERMISSION_VI_DOC. To do this, choose

Application and Scenario Communication Single Service Administration . In theSearch By field, select Consumer Proxy; in the Search Pattern field, enter/RPM/CO_PPMKMPERMISSION_VI_DOC; and in the Field field, select Internal Name.Choose Go. Select the entry found and choose Apply Selection. Choose Configurations,then choose Create Logical Port to create a logical port.

Make sure that you use the authentication setting User ID / Password to log on to the KMportal with a user that has content administrator rights.

Page 37: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 37

Creating/Changing the Status for Portfolio ObjectsIf you want to add your own status for Portfolio Management, you must first add a new objectstatus value and then include it in the sequence of the allowed status for the different objects.

Additionally, the sequence of the existing statuses can be changed.

Procedure1. Create the new object status value Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project

Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Object Status Values.

2. Adjust the sequence of the object status in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under:

o Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent SettingsDefine Portfolio Item Types (for Item and Decision Points in Items).

o Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio Dependent SettingsDefine Portfolio Types (for Review and What-If Status).

For more information, see the documentation for these IMG activities.

3. Assign the status to status groups. The status group determines whether an item isdisplayed on the active or inactive scope of the dashboard.

ItemsThe following status groups are considered inactive:

0500 Canceled

0700 Closed

0800 Rejected

This means that items in a status that is assigned to one of these status groups are displayed inthe Inactive Items dashboard scope.

For Initiatives, the mapping between status and status group cannot be Customized.

The following statuses are considered inactive:

Archived

Canceled

Completed

Locked

Initiatives in status released are displayed on the Released Initiatives dashboard scope.

Page 38: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

38 October 2012

For Initiatives, the status logic is derived from Project Management, which means it is possible todefine additional user statuses for Initiatives. For more information, see details in DefiningSettings for Initiative Management [Page 68] under User Status .

Page 39: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 39

Activating WorkflowPortfolio Management includes a workflow function that enables workflows when:

Attributes of items, initiatives, or initiative decision points are changed.

The status of items, initiatives, or initiative decision points are changed.

Items or initiatives are deleted.

ProcedureAll relevant Customizing can be found in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Managementunder Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings Workflow Settings :

1. Define in Define Workflow IDs the relevant workflow IDs. The workflow templatesprovided as standard are listed below; additionally, you can include customer-specificworkflows .

Object Workflow ObjectAbbreviation Object Name

Item (RIH) RPM_ItemChg Item Attributes Change Workflow

Item (RIH) RPM_ItemDel Item Deletion Workflow

Item (RIH) RPM_ItmStChg Item Status Change Workflow

Initiative (IPO) RPM_InitChg Initiative Attribute Change Workflow

Initiative (IPO) RPM_InitDel Initiative Deletion Workflow

Initiative (IPO) RPM_InitStCh Initiative Status Change Workflow

Decision Point(EPO) RPM_DPChg Item Decision Point attribute change

Decision Point(EPO) RPM_DPStChg Item DP Status Change Workflow

Decision Point(EPO) RPM_InitDpCh Initiative DP Attribute Change Workflow

Decision Point(EPO) RPM_InitDpSt Initiative DP Status Change Workflow

2. In Activate Workflows, set all relevant workflows to Active (by default all Workflows areinactive).

3. Define in Maintain Configuration for Workflow Recipients the recipients for the workflows.The standard delivery consists of entries for all the workflows for Admin activity. You canchange these entries and add new entries.

Page 40: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

40 October 2012

4. For workflows pertaining to attribute changes (RPM_ItemChg, RPM_InitChg,RPM_DPChg, RPM_InitDpCh), define the logic for the relevant fields and activate theimplementations in the following Business Add-Ins (BAdI):

1. To trigger the workflow relevant to attribute changes for an item, activate theimplementation RPM_PROJ_CUST_WF of the BAdI definitionRPM_PROJ_CUST_FIELDS.

2. To trigger the workflow relevant to attribute changes for an initiative, activate theimplementation INM_INITIATIVE_WF of the BAdI definitionINM_INITIATIVE_O_BADI.

3. To trigger the workflow relevant to attribute changes for a decision point, activatethe implementation /RPM/DES_POINT_WF of the BAdI definition/RPM/DECISION_POINT.

5. For workflow relevant to status changes for Item and Item Decision Points(RPM_ItmStChg, RPM_DPStChg), maintain the relevant workflow ID in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Portfolio Item Types to set thenext status to be used to trigger a workflow.

6. For workflow relevant to status changes for Initiative Decision Points (RPM_InitDpSt),maintain the relevant workflow ID in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Initiative Types to set the next status to be used totrigger a workflow.

7. By default, the workflow will be triggered for every status change for InitiativeRPM_InitStCh. If you want to trigger the workflow for specific statuses, use methodIF_INM_EX_INITIATIVE_O~ON_CHANGES_COMMITTED of BAdiINM_INITIATIVE_O_BADI to add the logic.

Page 41: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 41

Making Settings for the Graphical ViewThe Timeline Monitor and the Portfolio Structure Graphic of Portfolio Management isimplemented by a Web Dynpro ABAP control which uses an internal Java applet, for you whichyou have to make the settings described below.

ProcedureInstall a Java runtime environment (JRE or Java plug-in) on the local PC.

We recommend that you use the latest version of the Java plug-in. We also recommendthat you install the latest version of the applet, which can be found in SAP Note 1035436.

After updating the applet, make sure that the cache of the JRE is reset (see SAP Note 1014150).

The Java runtime environment has a fixed memory size which cannot be increasedduring runtime. This can cause OutOfMemory exceptions when working with thegraphical view. SAP Note 1014381 describes how to adjust the parameters of the JRE.

The applet does not always load when running in a portal environment; see SAP Note945516 for a description of how the portal needs to be customized.

See also SAP Note 1402912 for supported browsers, recommended browser settings andsupported Java runtime versions.

Page 42: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

42 October 2012

Making Global Enhancements to Portfolio ObjectsProcedureYou can enhance the application according to your needs, to a certain degree.

Define Customer-Specific Fields1. In Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio

Management Global Customizing Global Field Settings Check Object Types andSupported Structures , check which structure is relevant for custom fields of specialobject type (structure type = ‘C Customer Fields’). Check that the CI Include for thisstructure is already created; if not, create it.

2. Add the fields to this CI structure:

1. The data elements/component types for the custom fields should be properlyselected:

1. A custom icon field should be added with the data element ICON_D.

2. A custom checkbox should be created with data element XFELD orBOOLE_D.

3. For a drop-down field in the data element, either add the possible valuesdirectly or via a value table.

2. If the value of one field determines the value help of another field or fields (as instandard area and location), maintain the foreign key relationship.

3. To display the new fields on the interface, add it to the views/subviews of the detailscreens in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under PortfolioManagement Global Customizing Global Field Settings Assign Field to View/Subview .

4. Define the settings for the new fields in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global FieldSettings Define Custom Field Configuration:

1. The custom field can be assigned to services in Field Configuration.

2. In UI Configuration the visibility, state (mandatory or normal), enabled status ofthe field, and Read-only can be set. You can also assign Activity for changing theUI attributes of the fields based on authorization, for example, if the scenariorequires any field to be visible to users with ‘Admin’ authorization and invisible toothers. In this case, maintain the field corresponding to all activities, and for‘Admin’ set the attribute Visible as True, and for others set as False).

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) All available BAdIs for Portfolio Management can be found only in Customizing for SAP

Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Business Add-Insand Customer Includes .

Page 43: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 43

All available BAdIs for Synchronisation (DFM) can be found in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Common Functions under Decision FlowManagement Settings Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

For more information, see the documentation for the activities.

Activating Customer Connection EnhancementsIn the Customer Connection program, improvement requests raised by customers have beenimplemented and delivered through SAP notes and support packages. In the PortfolioManagement area, this applies to the following enhancements, for example:

The use of the SAP List Viewer (ALV) for the financial and capacity planning screens

The creation of change documents for financial and capacity planning values

The generation of readable IDs or numbers for Portfolio Management objects

By default, all Customer Connection improvements are switched off in the system. To be able touse them, you need to implement a corresponding BAdI method, or activate a global switch inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management.

For a full list of Customer Connection enhancements to SAP Portfolio and Project Management,see SAP Note 1631964. For more information about the individual enhancements and the wayyou can activate them, see the related SAP notes as well as the corresponding release notes forSAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0.

Page 44: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

44 October 2012

Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV)Prerequisites

You have activated the FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application (/BCV/MAIN)business function in transaction SFW5.

You made sure that the following InfoSet Queries for /RPM/BCV_USR user group aregenerated:

o QUE_ITEMS_C

o QUE_BUC_FD_T

o QUE_BUD_VAR

o QUE_CAP_PLN

o QUE_FIN_PLN

o QUE_INIT

o QUE_BUCK_FD

o QUE_INIT_C

o QUE_INIT_FD

o QUE_INIT_FD_T

o QUE_INIT_G

o QUE_ITEMS

o QUE_ITEMS_G

o QUE_ITEM_FD

o QUE_ITEM_FD_T

o QUE_PHASES

o QUE_PHASES_G

o QUE_PLAN_ACT

o QUE_PRJ_COST

o QUE_PRJ_COST_C

o QUE_WI_ITEMS

o QUE_WI_ITEMS_C

o QUE_WI_ITEMS_G

You do this using transaction sq01.

Page 45: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 45

Procedure1. To activate the BCV Content in Portfolio Management used, for example, for Reporting

Cockpit, you must ensure that the user is assigned to the following PFCG roles:

o SAP_BCV_USER

o SAP_RPM_BCV_USER

These two roles are included in the composite role SAP_RPM_BCV_USER_COMP.

2. The Xcelsius dashboards for Portfolio Management are implemented as BCV queryviews of type Xcelsius. In order to use this it is necessary to import the SWF file of theXcelsius dashboard to the Portfolio Management system. The SWF files for the Xcelsiusdashboards in Standard are included in Mime Repository of the Portfolio ManagementSystem in SAP / Public / PPM.

For more information about BCV, see SAP Library at http://help.sap.com under SAP Portfolioand Project Management 5.0 Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT)

Business Context Viewer (BCV) .

See also SAP Library at http://help.sap.com under SAP Project and Portfolio Management 5.0Portfolio Management Reporting Cockpit .

Page 46: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

46 October 2012

Making Settings for SAP BusinessObjects ExplorerYou can find the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer pushbutton on any object dashboard, exceptitem template dashboard, initiative template dashboard, resource dashboard, and staffingdashboard.

Prerequisites You must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008 Enhanced Capital

and Resource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing GlobalSettings Override Default Global Settings .

You have configured an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer in your landscape or you are using the BIon demand landscape (https://bi.ondemand.com).

ProcedureUpdate Certificates

1. Access the Trust Manager activity by choosing transaction code STRUST.

2. Choose the SSL client in the navigation tree. Select Import Certificate and select thecertificate of the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer system (for example, CN=UTN-USERFirst-Hardware, OU=http://www.usertrust.com, O=The USERTRUST Network,L=Salt Lake City, SP=UT, C=US for bi.ondemand.com).

3. Choose Add to Certificate List.

4. Save your changes.

Define Client Proxy Settings1. Access the Maintain Services activity by choosing transaction code SICF.

2. Choose Execute and then choose Client Proxy Settings .

3. In the dialog box, make the following settings in the Global Settings tab:

Field Entry

Proxy Setting is Active X

No Proxy Setting for Local Server X

No Proxy for the Following Adresses *.<company>.<com>

4. Make the following settings in the HTTP Log tab

Field Entry

Host Name <ProxyName>

Port <ProxyPort>

Page 47: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 47

Field Entry

User Name Empty or Domain User

PW Empty or Domain Logon

5. Make the following settings in the HTTPs Log tab

Field Entry

Host Name <ProxyName>

Port <ProxyPort>

User Name Empty or Domain User

PW Empty or Domain Logon

6. Save your changes.

Restart ICM1. Access the ICM Monitor activity by choosing transaction code SMICM..

2. Choose Administration ICM Restart Yes .

3. Choose Administration ICM Exit Hard Global .

Create Connection to SAP BusinessObjects Explorer System1. Access the Configuration of RFC Connections activity by choosing transaction code

SM59.

2. Choose Create and create a connection with the following settings:

Field Entry

RFCDestination

<SAP BusinessExplorer Explorer System>(for example,SAP_BI_ONDEMAND)

ConnectionType G

Description SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

3. Choose Enter and make the following settings:

Technical Settings

Field Entry

Target Host <Target host of SAP BusinessExplorer System>, for examplebi.ondemand.com

Service No. </HTTPS port of SAP BusinessExplorer system>, for example 443

Page 48: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

48 October 2012

Technical Settings

Field Entry

Path Prefix <Path Prefix> if required, for example /

Logon & Security

LogonProcedure

No Logon, that is activate the Do not Use a User and the Do not SendLogon Ticket radio button.

SSL Active

SSLCertificate <SSL certificate as defined in STRUST>

4. Save your RFC destination.

5. You can now test your newly-created RFC connection by choosing Connection Test.

Activate SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Integration in Customizing1. Access the Customizing activity by choosing transaction code SPRO and choose in

Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under PortfolioManagement Global Customizing Global Settings Override Default GlobalSettings .

1. Choose New Entries.

2. Enter the following data:

Field Entry

Area 0007

Name 0028

Settings Value <Name of the RFC destination for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer>

3. Save your changes.

ResultYou have now configured the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Integration for the dashboards.

More InformationFor more information about the Installation and Upgrade of SAP BusinessObjects Explorere, seehttps://service.sap.com/bosap-explorer Installation & Upgrade Guides SAP Business Objects

SAP Business Objects Intelligence (BI) Explorer XI 3.1 .

Page 49: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 49

Definition of Security Lists for OfficeControlsPortfolio and Project Management uses OfficeControls for the Microsoft Project integration andfor the HTTP-based check-in and check-out of documents. Since rendered pages are normallydisplayed in a Web browser connected to the Internet in Web Dynpro, security aspects must beconsidered for UI elements like OfficeControls.

Therefore the following security measures have been implemented for OfficeControl:

OfficeControl communicates only with authorized servers

Data can be stored only in authorized directories

Data can be read only from authorized directories

Only authorized file types can be opened directly with the default application

The authorized servers and directories and the authorized file types are listed in a whitelist forsecurity reasons; an administrator stores this information locally using transactionsWDR_ACF_WLIST and ACF_WHITELIST_SETUP. If requests for access to directories orcommunication with servers are sent using HTTP or HTTPS, the control first checks whether thisis allowed at all. It then compares the directories or servers in question with the data in the localwhite list file. It executes the relevant methods only if the authorization is set in the whitelist.

Whitelist certificates can be generated using transaction WDR_ACF_GEN_CERT and need to beinstalled on all end user PCs. To install the whitelist certificate, go to transactionACF_WHITELIST_SETUP and choose Install Certificate.

For more information, see Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server WebDynpro ABAP Set Up Whitelist for Active Controls and Activate Whitelist for Active Controls,as well as SAP notes 1544293 and 1502999.

For more information about the required Java version for the OfficeControl, see SAP Note1402912.

More InformationActivating HTTP-Based Document Management [Page 50]

Making Settings for Microsoft Project Integration [Page 56]

Page 50: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

50 October 2012

Activating HTTP-Based Document ManagementSAP Portfolio and Project Management supports HTTP-based check-in and check-out ofdocuments.

PrerequisitesYou have entered a valid user for the SICF service sap/bc/contentserver and the service isactivated. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by KeyCapability Knowledge Provider (BC-SRV-KPR) Content Management Service (BC-SRV-KPR)

Concepts HTTP Access for Repositories on SAP Web Application Server .

Procedure1. Activate HTTP-based document management. For more information, see Customizing for

Portfolio Management under Global Customizing Global Settings Override DefaultGlobal Settings .

2. Choose New Entries and enter the following data:

o Area: 0007 General Default Values

o Name: 0027 Check-in/Check-out of Documents (' ': Normal, 'X': HTTP-Based)

o Settings Value: ‘X’ to activate HTTP-based check-in/check-out of documents and‘ ‘ to deactivate the HTTP-Based check-in and check-out of documents.

3. Save your changes.

To use the HTTP-based check-in and check-out of documents every user needs to installa Java runtime on his client PC. For the required Java version see SAP Note 1402912.

More InformationDefinition of Security Lists for OfficeControls [Page 49]

Page 51: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 51

System ConnectionsThis section contains information about connecting the systems in a SAP system landscape. Thisinvolves, for example:

Defining logical systems and assigning clients in the Online Transaction ProcessingSystem (OLTP).

Determining the systems, servers, clients, distribution models and so on, in the system inwhich the SAP application component is installed.

Completing the configuration settings and performing other activities required for theinteractions in a SAP system landscape.

ProcessPerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

See also SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

Page 52: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

52 October 2012

Making Settings for Integration with EnterprisePortalThis process enables you to use Portfolio Management in the Enterprise Portal by means of theBusiness Package for SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0. For more information, seeSAP Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP Business Suite SAPPortfolio and Project Management Business Package for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0 . Each user has access to various initial views (roles, worksets, and iViews),depending on his or her authorizations and the portal roles assigned.

PrerequisitesYou have installed Enterprise Portal and imported the Business Package for SAP Portfolio andProject Management 5.0. Make sure you have defined the portal systems aliases as described inthe Business Package documentation. See also SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases[Page 22].

ProcessThe back-end configuration of SAP Portfolio and Project Management is not automaticallyreflected in the Portal because the content of the portal roles is static and is not adjusted tomatch. You create the appropriate portal roles and align them with the PFCG roles in the back-end so that the authorizations defined in the back-end fit to the portal roles. To do this, you canuse the predefined portal content delivered with the Business Package for Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0 as examples or templates.

The collaboration room lies in the Enterprise Portal. The integration with collaborationrooms is available as follows:

You are using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 in the EnterprisePortal.

You are using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 as a stand-aloneversion and you have a connection to an external Enterprise Portal.

For more information about using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 in the Portal, seeSAP Note 1377104.

If you want to navigate away and have forgotten to save your changes, you can use WorkProtectMode in the portal to avoid data loss. For example, you can set WorkProtect Mode up in such away that the system asks the user whether the unsaved data should be saved before navigation.For more information about WorkProtect Mode, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under

Getting Started Using SAP Software First Steps Portal Personalizing the PortalSetting Portal Preferences .

When you use SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 in Enterprise Portal, the sameprotocol must be used to access the portal as is used for accessing the portal in thePortfolio and Project Management back end system, that is, either HTTP for both of or

Page 53: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 53

HTTPS for both. If they are not the same, you may not be able to call the Gantt chart andpop-ups. See SAP Note 945516.

See also:Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22]

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [Page 26]

Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [Page 17]

Page 54: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

54 October 2012

Preparing the Integration with Collaboration Rooms(Portf. Mgmt)You access collaboration rooms via the tab page Collaboration Room under Documents andNotes in Portfolio Management. The documents and authorizations are synchronized betweenthe Item / Initiative and the assigned collaboration room. Relevant configuration can be done inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management BaseSystem Interfaces Integration with Collaboration Rooms .

PrerequisitesYou have authorization for the following objects:

Display/Create Logical Port (transaction LPCONFIG): authorization object S_SRT_LPR

Maintain Services (transaction SICF): authorization object S_ICF_ADM

ProcedureCreating Logical Ports Using SOA ManagerPerform the Create Logical Ports Using SOA Manager activity in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces Integrationwith Collaboration Rooms . For more information see the documentation in Customizing.

Creating a Logical Port1. Perform the Create Logical Ports activity in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project

Management under Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces Integration withCollaboration Rooms

o Enter CO_DPR_CR_ROOM_ABAPWSVI_DOCUME as the proxy class in the LogicalPort area.

o In the other scenarios you can choose the name of the logical port. The namecannot be one that has already been used elsewhere.

2. If you want to use an HTTP connection on the Call Parameters tab page, you must havecreated a type “G” (HTTP Connections for External Server) connection usingConfiguration of RFC Connections (transaction SM59).

o Enter /RoomABAPWS/Config1?style=document as the path suffix.

o On the Logon & Security tab page, select Send SAP Logon Ticket.

3. Activate the logical port.

Creating/Changing the Room Back-End SystemYou create the room back-end system in the portal; it is the actual portal system itself. You needthe room back-end system to create the link for entering the room in the Room column in PortfolioManagement.

Page 55: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 55

In the portal, choose System Administration System Configuration KnowledgeManagement Collaboration Room Back-End Properties .

Setting Up the SAP Authentication TicketYou set up the SAP authentication ticket in the portal. For more information, see SAP NetWeaverLibrary on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaverLibrary SAP NetWeaver Security Guide User Administration and Authentication UserAuthentication and Single Sign-On . The following documents are particularly useful:

Configuring the J2EE Engine to Accept Logon Tickets

Adjusting the Login Module Stacks for Using Logon Tickets

If the test report CHECK_SSO_ACCESS_TO_PORTAL does not require any user identification, itmeans you successfully set up the trust relationship between Portfolio Management and theportal. You execute this report in the Portfolio Management system using transaction SE38.

Page 56: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

56 October 2012

Making Settings for Microsoft Project IntegrationProjects that are assigned to Items in Portfolio Management can be exported to Microsoft®Project from the Portfolio Management application. You can also import in Portfolio Managementprojects from Microsoft Project to Project Management (in case when the projects are assigned toan Item). You have to configure the communication between Project Management and MicrosoftProject (MSP) for this integration with Microsoft Project. In addition, you have to assign ProjectManagement fields to MSP fields and the other way round.

PrerequisitesMicrosoft Project

You have installed Microsoft Project on your local PC (supported versions: Refer to SAPNote 892638 for supported MS Project versions.)

You have activated ActiveX controls in your browser. When you carry out an import orexport for the first time, the system asks you to install the ActiveX control supplied bySAP.

Import and export to or from MS Project is only supported when either Internet Exploreror NWBC for Desktop (with browser rendering from Internet Explorer) are used. It is notsupported for Firefox, for example.

ProcedureFor details concerning configuration in Project Management, see Making Settings for MicrosoftProject Integration [External] in the Project Management Configuration Guide.

ResultOnce you have carried out the configuration steps named above, users can synchronize theirproject plans (.mpp files), and they can import the data from .mpp files and export the data to.mpp files as often as they like.

More InformationDefinition of Security Lists for OfficeControls [Page 49]

Page 57: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 57

Defining Integration with Project System (PS)ProcedureYou can integrate SAP Portfolio and Project Management and SAP ERP in the Decision FlowManagement (DFM) area: You can use PS project definition and WBS elements as DFM objects.With this, you can create a PS project in SAP ERP when creating an item in PortfolioManagement or link existing PS projects to items. You can also link WBS elements to itemdecision points. These linkages support the following DFM functions:

Attributes Synchronization

Status Synchronization

For more information about financial integration, see Financial and Capacity Planning [Page 107].

PrerequisitesIn the SAP Portfolio and Project Management system, you must have activated the 0002 (MasterSwitch) -> 0007 0007(Integration with PS and FI/CO (see SAP Note 1427365)) in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Global Settings Override Default Global Settings .

Activities1. To enable synchronization from Project System to SAP Portfolio and Project

Management, in the SAP ERP system, you must maintain the RFC destination inCustomizing for Integration with Other mySAP.com Components under PortfolioManagement Maintain Gen. Settings for Portf. and Proj. Mgmt Intgrn .

2. You enter the RFC Destination that must point to SAP Portfolio and Project Managementsystem.

3. If you want to use real-time synchronization, you set the value for the Synchronization Onfield to true.

If you do not need real-time synchronization from Project System to SAP Portfolioand Project Management, then you can synchronize later by executing theINM_DFM_SYNCH report with the required selection in the SAP Portfolio andProject Management system.

4. In addition, you must maintain the settings for Decision Flow Management. For moreinformation see, Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management [Page 88].

Page 58: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

58 October 2012

Setting Up ALE between SAP Portf. and Proj. Mgmtand FI/COYou use application link enabling (ALE) to distribute data between the Financial and Controlling(FI/CO) system and the SAP Portfolio and Project Management system.

PrerequisitesYou have maintained the following settings in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Financial andControlling Integration Common System Configuration and SAP FI-CO ALE Setup :

You have created logical systems under Application Link Enabling (ALE) BasicSettings Logical Systems Define Logical System .

You have assigned a logical system to a client under Application Link Enabling (ALE)Basic Settings Logical Systems Assign Logical System to Client .

You have maintained RFC destinations under Application Link Enabling (ALE)Communication Create RFC Connections .

ProcedureIn the SAP Portfolio and Project Management System:

1. Create a model view, generate partner profiles, and distribute the model view to the SAPPortfolio and Project Management system by performing the steps described in theorganizational activity in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Financial and ControllingIntegration SAP FI-CO System ALE Setup Maintain Distribution Model .

2. Check the Customizing settings for the inbound process code as described inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Base System Interfaces SAP Financial and Controlling Integration SAP Portfolioand Project Management System ALE Setup for SAP FI-CO Check Inbound ProcessCode Settings .

3. Change the inbound parameter of the partner profile by performing the steps inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Base System Interfaces SAP Financial and Controlling Integration SAP Portfolioand Project Management System ALE Setup for SAP FI-CO Change InboundParameter of Partner Profile .

In the FI/CO System:1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Base IDoc Interface / Application Link

Enabling (ALE) Modelling and Implementing Business Processes MaintainDistribution Model and Distribute Views and change to edit mode

2. Select the model view you created in the SAP Portfolio and Project system and generatepartner profiles by choosing Environment Generate Partner Profiles . Overwrite theID field and choose Execute.

For more information, see also Financial and Capacity Planning [Page 107].

Page 59: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 59

Preparing Object Links to Other SystemsBusiness objects that are important to a project or to an item can be located in different systems.Since it is important to have an overview of these objects in Portfolio Management, you can linkobjects as object links to the application.

SAP supplies object links for selected objects, for example, for work breakdown structures andnetworks. Before you can use these, you have to define the RFC destinations for the system.

Procedure1. Define the RFC destinations in the SAP menu under Tools Administration

Administration Network RFC Destinations . If the connected system is the sameone as the Portfolio Management system, use the default internal RFC destinationNONE.

2. It must be possible to log on to the linked system without a logon screen. To ensure this,choose one of the two options described in Ensuring Logon Without the Logon Screen[Page 62].

See also Setting Up Object Links [Page 71].

Page 60: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

60 October 2012

Object Navigator Integration for Material and RecipeInitiative and item from Portfolio Management, and project, phase, and task from ProjectManagement can be linked to a material using an object link (Material in PLM Web UI), and arecipe using an object link (Recipe in PLM Web UI). The object navigator displays therelationships between these objects.

The object navigator for material and recipe in the SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAPPLM) system displays the linked SAP Portfolio and Project Management objects. The objectnavigator for the above mentioned SAP Portfolio and Project Management objects displays thelinked materials and recipes of the SAP PLM system.

You can start the object navigator using the You Can Also link or opening the created object linkin the application.

PrerequisitesYou have activated the following switches:

/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT – Switch to activate material-related Customizing entries(switch package /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT)

/PLM/PPM_SFWS_RCP – Switch to activate recipe-related Customizing entries (switchpackage /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_RCP)

/PLM/PPM_SFWS_GEN – Switch to activate Customizing entries of SAP Portfolio andProject Management objects (switch package /PLM/PPM_SFWS_GEN)

You have activated the following business functions:

For material, /PLMU/WEB_UI_2 (allocated switches: /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_GEN and/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT)

For recipe, /PLMU/RCP_1 (allocated switches /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_GEN and/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_RCP)

ProcedureTo enable the integration with the object navigator for material and recipe, proceed as follows:

You define RFC destinations for the above mentioned object links. For more information aboutthe settings in Project Management, see Preparing Object Links to Other Systems [External]. Formore information about the settings in Portfolio Management, see Preparing Object Links toOther Systems [Page 59].

See also SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

Only if you have installed both SAP PLM and SAP Portfolio and Project Management on differentsystems, the following steps are required:

1. You define the external destinations for cross-system-enabled object types andrelationships in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes andTools for Enterprise Applications Object Navigator: Define Cross-System AccessSettings for Object Navigator or maintain view cluster /PLMB/V_NAV_XOT.

Page 61: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 61

2. You define the logical destination from the SAP Portfolio and Project Management ABAPsystem to the SAP PLM system as ‘HTTP connection to ABAP System’. Correspondingly,you define the logical destination from the SAP PLM ABAP system to the SAP Portfolioand Project Management system as ‘HTTP connection to ABAP System’. See also SM59Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

3. You define the system alias and logical system within view /PLMB/V_RFC_LSYS for bothSAP Portfolio and Project Management and SAP PLM systems.

Page 62: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

62 October 2012

Ensuring Logon Without the Logon Screen (Portf.Mgmt)If you want to use object links, you must ensure that you are able to log on to the connectedsystem without the logon screen, otherwise communication errors could occur. To ensure this,you have the following options:

You create a trusted/trusting RFC connection between the two systems.

In this case, the Portfolio and Project Management system, as the client, is always thetrusted system, and the linked system, as the server, is always the trusting system.

You enable logon using Single Sign-On (SSO).

ProcedureTrusted/Trusting RFC Connection

1. In the trusting system (SAP ERP), use transaction SMT1 to create the trusted/trustingRFC connection to the trusted system (Portfolio and Project Management).

The system creates a new connection with the name TRUSTED_SYSTEM[system name]in the Portfolio and Project Management system. This is for internal reasons and youcannot change it.

Note that errors may occur during the check when you create a trusted/trusting RFCconnection, if you work with different clients in the client and server.

2. In the SAP Menu in the Portfolio and Project Management system, open the RFCconnection to SAP ERP by choosing Tools Administration Administration

Network RFC Destinations .

3. Flag the system as the Trusted System under Logon/Security Security Options .

For more information, see SAP Note 128447.

Single Sign-OnMaintain the logon in transaction SM59 using Single Sign-On (SSO).

1. Choose SNC on the tab page Logon/Security and enter the required data.

2. Save your entries and activate the Active indicator.

For more information, see transaction SM59 under Help Application Help .

For more information, see the Security Guide for SAP Portfolio and Project Management on SAPService Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/securityguide.

Page 63: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 63

Identity ManagementYou use this function to manage the data of your employees across different SAP systems, suchas SAP Portfolio and Project Management, or SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAPHCM), using SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1.

Identity Management for SAP Portfolio and Project Management enables efficient and securemanagement of users and authorizations based on the assignment of roles to an identity; theseassignments may change over time. Assigning roles to an identity increases administrativeefficiency for day-to-day tasks related to Identity Management across the system landscape, andhelps you to fulfill legal requirements related to SAP Governance, risk governance, risk andcompliance tasks, security reviews, and audits. The users created from SAP NetWeaver IdentityManagement have the standard user configuration.

The SAP Identity Management system creates an identity for each employee. When you transferthe identity to SAP Portfolio and Project Management, the system creates a user and a businesspartner (BP) with the Processor business partner role. It also creates a Central Person for the BPthat manages the user ID, the personnel number, and the BP data.

BP creation is optional. You use the BAdI definition /RPM/IDENTITY_MAN to create BPs.

The following PFCG roles are provided by Identity Management for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement:

Technical Name Role Name

SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR Portfolio Management: Administrator

SAP_XRPM_USER Portfolio Management: User

SAP_CPR_PROJECT_ADMINISTRATOR Project Management: Project Lead

SAP_CPR_TEMPLATE_ADMINISTRATOR Project Management: TemplateResponsible

SAP_CPR_USER Project Management: User

SAP_BPR_PPM SAP Portfolio and Project ManagementPFCG role for NW BC

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER Role for Usage of BCV in ProjectManagement

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER_COMP User of BCV in Project Management

SAP_RPM_BCV_USER Portf. Mgmt BCV Authorization

SAP_RPM_BCV_USER_COMP Portf. Mgmt BCV User Profile

The system administrator assigns these roles to users that are created in SAP NetWeaverIdentity Management. The user creation is ABAP-based.

Page 64: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

64 October 2012

PrerequisitesYou have mapped the SAP HCM personnel area or sub-area to an SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement-specific location in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Managementunder Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Human Capital Integration DataDistribution from SAP HCM to SAP xRPM Map Personnel Areas to Locations . This setting isrequired only if you want to create BPs.

The background user in Identity Management, which is used for the RFC calls to the SAPPortfolio and Project Management application (when transferring identities), must have theauthorization of the PFCG role SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR. This role can update accesscontrol lists for SAP Portfolio and Project Management entities (such as portfolio or bucket), andcreate users and business partners in the SAP Portfolio and Project Management application.

ProcedureIn the Portfolio and Project Management application, there is a transfer to enable the BPapplication-specific creation scenario based on the employee information in the SAP HCMsystem. This process is currently done through SAP ERP HCM–SAP RPM ALE integration. Areport is executed in the SAP ERP HCM system for a particular employee ID. The details of thisemployee are transferred as a Business Partner to the Portfolio and Project Managementapplication.

User and business partner creation (optional) in transaction SU01 (User Maintenance) aresupported by SAP NetWeaver Identity Management. Unlike the ALE integration scenario, whereonly a BP is created in the SAP Portfolio and Project Management application, the IdentityManagement function enables the creation of users and BPs. However, the SAP NetWeaverIdentity Management scenario does not replace the existing SAP ERP HCM–ALE integrationscenario. The SAP NetWeaver Identity Management and the SAP ERP HCM–ALE integrationscenarios co-exist.

An SAP Portfolio and Project Management user created by Identity Management and the creationof the BP based on certain mapping (via SAP Portfolio and Project Management-specific BAdIimplementations) is supported. SAP NetWeaver Identity Management supports the creation andupdate of BPs with only basic attributes. The SAP ERP HCM–ALE integration scenario can berun later to transfer the SAP HCM employee attributes, such as availability, to the BP alreadycreated using SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.

We recommend that you create a user together with a BP and then execute the SAPERP HCM–SAP RPM integration scenario.

Page 65: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 65

Business CustomizingThis section contains information about the Customizing settings in each system. BusinessCustomizing adjusts the company-neutral delivered functionality to the specific requirements ofthe company. This involves, for example:

Organizational unit Customizing

Master data Customizing

Process Customizing

ProcessPerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 66: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

66 October 2012

Portfolio Management

Page 67: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 67

Defining Settings for the Portfolio StructureIn this procedure, you define the object types for various objects that you work with in PortfolioManagement.

Default entries are supplied with the standard system. However, you can also define your ownentries in addition.

ProcedureCarry out the activities described in the table. You can find them in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Dependent Settings or Portfolio-Independent Settings or Base System Interfaces .

Activity What you should know

Define PortfolioTypes

You use the portfolio type to classify the area in which a portfolio is used.You can use these portfolio types, for example, to override the default fieldconfiguration.

Examples: Consumer Goods, Information Technology

Define PortfolioItem Types

You use the portfolio item type to model your process for portfolio items,for example, by defining the relevant decision points.

Examples: Concept, Proposal

Define InitiativeTypes

You use the initiative types to model your process for initiatives, forexample, by defining the relevant decision points.

Examples: Proposal Initiative, Consulting Initiative

Define ObjectTypes for ObjectLinks

You activate the object types for which you want to create object links inyour project.

Examples: PS Project, Internal Order

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 68: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

68 October 2012

Defining Settings for Initiative ManagementInitiative Management combines several items into one program. To use initiative management,you need to activate several Project Management activities.

PrerequisitesYou have maintained the initiative types by choosing Define Initiative Types.

ProcedureStructureAn Initiative reuses some project Customizing. To define the initiative type, go to ProjectManagement Structure Define Project Types .

The project type 000000000000DFM Initiative represents the initiative, which supports onlya limited set of project functions. You can activate/deactivate only the following:

Documents

Phases

Checklists

Evaluations only with background processing

Scheduling

Digital signature of approvals

Field control

You define the initiative type and decision points of the initiative in Portfolio ManagementGlobal Customizing Portfolio Independent Settings Define Initiative Types .

ResponsiblesYou want to define Responsibles for your initiative. The initiative follows the same responsiblelogic as Project Management.

The assignment of Responsible follows the Project Management Staffing process. You can onlystaff Business Partners to project roles. Business Partners can be created manually or usingHCM Integration. You can set up Business Partners as described in the following sections in theProject Management Configuration Guide:

under Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data Creating a Business Partner .

under Data Replication Setting Up Project Management with HCM in SAP PLMDistributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management .

To define role types, use Project Management Resource Management Basic Settings forRoles Define Role Types . For more information, see Defining Project Roles in the ProjectManagement Configuration Guide.

Page 69: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 69

To be able to use these role types for initiatives you must link the role type to the project typeInitiative in the Customizing activity Project Management Structure Define Project Typesfor the Project Type Project Role Types for Project Type .

Phase and checklist types, which you can use for initiatives, are defined in:

Project Management Structure Define Phase Types

Project Management Structure Define Checklist Types

For more information see Defining Settings for the Project Structure [External] in the ProjectManagement Configuration Guide.

Status ManagementIf you want to define your own user status for initiatives, in addition to the system status deliveredby SAP, you must create a status profile for the status. You can create or change a status profileat Project Management Basic Settings Create/Change User Status for Status Profile .

To activate a user status for initiatives or initiative template, navigate to the details of the statusprofile and choose Object Type. Select Initiatives: Proj. Definition to activate the status profile forinitiatives, and Initiatives: Project Template to activate the status profile for initiative templates.

For more information see Creating/Changing the Status Profile for Project Elements [External] inthe Project Management Configuration Guide.

Items of InitiativeAn initiative can cluster several items. With Decision Flow Management (DFM), you have theoption of automatically mapping and synchronizing the decision points of the initiative and itsassigned items. To use this, you need to specify the item type. Choose Portfolio Management

Global Customizing Portfolio Independent Settings Define Initiative Types Select Item ofInitiative Type .

Map the decision points between the item type and the initiative type for each item type bychoosing Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio Independent Settings

Define Initiative Types Select Item of Initiative Type Map Decision Points .

Page 70: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

70 October 2012

Preparing PrintingTo print in Portfolio Management you need print forms, which specify what information is to beprinted and the layout. SAP supplies reference print forms in the standard system. You can addyour own print forms.

Portfolio Management uses SAP PDF-Based Forms by Adobe.

Prerequisites Installing Adobe Document Services (ADS) is required for printing. For more information

about setting up ADS, see Adobe Document Services – Configuration Guide NW 2004son SAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/adobe under ADSConfiguration.

You have set up an RFC connection ADS for Printing in transaction SM59. In addition, ifdigital signatures are used in the approval process, a secure RFC connectionADS_HTTPS is required.

If you want to use the ALV table print function, you have to set up printing for WebScreen ABAP ALV in Customizing for SAP NetWeaver by choosing Application Server

SAP List Viewer (ALV) Set-Up Printing for Web Screen ABAP ALV Set-Up WebService Destination for Adobe Document Services .

ProcedureTo set up PDF-Based Forms, perform the following activities in Customizing for PortfolioManagement under Global Customizing Process and Service Settings Forms for Printing

:

1. Create new forms under Create PDF-Based Print Forms.

We recommend creating new forms by copying the forms that SAP provides. You maynot change the interface.

2. Create a BAdI implementation for the new forms using the BAdI: Print Fact SheetForms(/RPM/EX_PFSFORM_BADI).

Do not make any changes to the methods of the new implementation as this mayprevent the new forms from working

Copy the implementation of the BAdI with the form you copied to a new BAdIimplementation as a filter value. You use the new form as the filter value in this BAdIimplementation. You can find the BAdI implementation for the original form by searchingfor the implementation of the BAdI definition /RPM/EX_PFSFORM_BADI with the originalform as the filter value.

3. Under Define Print Forms per Object Types, you maintain the print forms that should beavailable for item and initiative.

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 71: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 71

Setting Up Object Links (Portf. Mgmt)With Portfolio Management, SAP delivers object links to the following SAP objects:

SAP Object Type Object Type in PortfolioManagement

Project Management Project Definition 0RPMCPPROJECT

Project Management Project Template 0RPMCPPROJECT_T

Project Management Phase 0RPMCPPHASE

Project Management Task 0RPMCPTASK

Project Management Task: used in case of ProjectManagement Import/Export to create a task link. 0RPMCPRLTSKASGN

Project Management Checklist 0RPMCPCHECKLIST

Project Management Checklist Item 0RPMCPCHKLISTIT

Project Management Role 0RPMCPROLE

Project Management Project Definition (MSP) 0RPMMSPCPROJECT

Project Management Phase (MSP) 0RPMMSPCPHASE

Project Management Task (MSP) 0RPMMSPCTASK

Project Management Checklist (MSP) 0RPMMSPCCLIST

Project Management Checklist Item (MSP) 0RPMMSPCCITEM

Project Management Resource (MSP) 0RPMMSPCRES

Project Definition (PS) 0RPMPSPROJECT

Project Template (PS): used during the Project System exportto copy the template and create a new project in ProjectSystem with the Project Management Project data

0RPMPSTEMPLATE

WBS (PS) 0RPMPSWBSELEMNT

Network (PS) 0RPMPSNETWORK

Network Activity (PS) 0RPMPSNETWRKACT

Network Activity Link (PS): used during the Project Systemimport to import the Network 0RPMPSRLRESASGN

Network Activity Element (PS) 0RPMPSNETACTEL

Team (PS): used during the Project System import to importthe Team 0RPMPSTEAM

Page 72: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

72 October 2012

SAP Object Type Object Type in PortfolioManagement

Role (PS): used during the Project System import to import theRoles 0RPMPSROLE

FI/CO Int: Internal Order 0RPMFIINTORDER

FI/CO Int: Maintenance Order 0RPMFIPMORDER

FI/CO Int: Project Definition (PS) 0RPMFIPROJECT

FI/CO Int: WBS (PS) 0RPMFIWBSELEMNT

FI/CO Int: WBS (PS), used for hierarchical processing 0RPMFIWBSHIERAR

FI/CO Int: Network(PS) 0RPMFINETWORK

FI/CO Int: Network (PS), used for hierarchical processing 0RPMFINETWRKACT

FI/CO Int: Network Activity (PS) 0RPMFINETWRKACT

FI/CO Int: Network Activity (PS), used for hierarchicalprocessing 0RPMFINWAHIERAR

FI/CO Int: Network Activity Element(PS) 0RPMFINETACTEL

Document (DMS) 0RPMDOCUMENT

xPD Concept 0XPD_CONCEPT

If you want to use additional object types, you must develop the relevant object linksyourself. For more information, see the Guide for Implementing an Object Link on theSAP Service Marketplace using http://service.sap.com/plm-inst SAP Portfolio andProject Management .

The object links are deactivated by default.

ProcedureSettings in the Portfolio Management SystemCarry out the following activities in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces Application Object Settings:

Make Settings for Calling an SAP Transaction

Define Object Link Types:

1. Activate all links you want to use under Settings for Object Link Type.

2. Select a link and choose (Details).

3. Under Destination, enter an RFC destination.

Page 73: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 73

The destination is required if you want to use the existence check, thesearch help, or the data display for processing object links. Otherwise,these functions are not available.

If you have installed the application that contains the linked object on thesame system as Project Management, use the default internal RFCdestination NONE.

4. Under Web Server, enter the ITS Web server or a Web Server Alias which youhave defined under Make Settings for Calling an SAP Transaction.

The server is required if you want to call a Web application for processing alinked object.

5. Make any changes you require to the rest of the entries then save your data.

You can access information about the individual fields in the field help (F1).

6. Make any changes that you require to the default settings in the sub-activities forSettings of Object Link Type.

7. Repeat this procedure for every active object link.

Page 74: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

74 October 2012

Setting Up the BW InterfaceProcedureCarry out the following activities in Customizing for Portfolio Management under ActivateBusiness Content Data Sources Business Content Data Sources :

Transfer Application Component Hierarchy

Transfer Business ContentDataSources

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 75: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 75

Configuring Navigation (Portf. Mgmt)With navigation configuration, the standard navigation can be modified or enhanced according tocustomer-specific processes. This means that the navigation functions of the workcenter,dashboards, as well as detail screens can be adjusted.

ProcedureFor details concerning FPM configuration, check SAP Note 1405902.

Role

If the entire role structure is to be changed:

1. Create a new portal role in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Portal roles .

2. Copy the portal role / PFCG role and change the application parameterIV_PORTAL_ROLE from the old role to the new role in all Workcenter iViews(application INM_WORKCENTER_APP) of the new role .

3. Copy all entries from the old role to the new role in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Process and Service Settings Navigation Settings Define Object Contextfor Navigation / Define Related Object Context for Navigation .

The navigation for the new role can now be adjusted as described below.

Workcenter ToolbarYou can modify the workcenter toolbar by adding Buttons and ButtonChoices in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Process and Service Settings Navigation Settings :

1. In Define Related Object Context, check which LaunchPad role is assigned to the currentcontext specified by Application Type, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role, RelatedObject Type, and Scenario (also referred to as Workcenter).

2. If the role of step 1 fits, go directly to step 3.; if not, create a new LaunchPad role in SetUp LaunchPads.

3. In Set Up LaunchPads, create or update the LaunchPad for the role identified in step 1and 2, and instance WORKCENTER. Each application in the LaunchPad represents aButton. ButtonChoices can be defined as applications with a one-level folder structure. Besure to maintain a unique key for the parameter Application Alias.

Here, the parameters Application Category, Namespace, Application, and System Aliasspecify the target application. In field Appl Parameter, you can specify the name or valuepairs of parameters to be statically passed to the target application.

4. In Define Navigation Settings, create a line for each new application of the newLaunchPad. In this scenario both attributes ACL Activity and Link Provider are relevant.

Page 76: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

76 October 2012

To remove Buttons or ButtonChoices from the workcenter toolbar, you must delete thesettings described above.

Workcenter ScopeYou can modify the workcenter structure by adding or removing tabs as well as RadioButtons inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Process and Service Settings Navigation Settings :

1. In Define Related Object Context, check which LaunchPad Role is assigned to thecurrent context specified by Application Type, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role,Related Object Type, and Scenario (also referred to as Workcenter).

2. If the role of step 1 fits, go directly to step 3; if not, create a new LaunchPad role intransaction Set Up LaunchPads.

3. In Set Up LaunchPads, create/update the LaunchPad for the role identified in step 1 and2, and instance SCOPE. Each application in the LaunchPad represents a tab.RadioButtons can be defined as folders in which parameter Application Alias identifiesthe LaunchPad role of the tab structure underneath. Be sure to maintain a unique key forthe parameter Application Alias. Here, the parameters Application Category, Namespace,Application, and System Alias are not taken into account. In field Appl Parameter, youcan specify name/value pairs of parameters to be statically passed to the ABAP WDwindow embedded within the corresponding tab.

4. In Define Navigation, create a line for each new application of the new LaunchPad. In thisscenario, only the attributes Target Component, Target View, and Target Plug arerelevant and specify the ABAP WD View to be embedded within the corresponding tab.

To remove tabs or RadioButtons from the workcenter, you must delete the settingsdescribed above.

Dashboard ToolbarYou can modify the dashboard toolbar by adding or removing Buttons as well as ButtonChoicesin Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Global Customizing Process and Service Settings Navigation Settings :

1. In Define Related Object Context, check which LaunchPad role is assigned to the currentcontext specified by Application Type, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role, RelatedObject Type, and Scenario.

Note that for all Workcenter dashboards, the terms 'Scenario' and 'Workcenter'are equivalent, and that for all dashboards embedded in detail screens, the term'Scenario” is equivalent to 'Detail Screen.'

2. If the role of step 1 fits, go directly to step 3; if not, create a new LaunchPad role in SetUp LaunchPads.

3. In Set Up LaunchPads, create or update the LaunchPad for the role identified in step 1and 2, and instance DASH. Each application in the LaunchPad represents a Button.ButtonChoices can be realized as applications with a one-level folder structure. Be awareof maintaining a unique key for parameter Application Alias. Here, the parametersApplication Category, Namespace, Application, and System Alias specify the target

Page 77: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 77

application. In field Appl Parameter, you can specify the name or value pairs ofparameters to be statically passed to the target application.

4. In Define Navigation, create a line for each new application of the new or updatedLaunchPad. In this scenario, both attributes ACL Activity and Link Provider are relevant.

To remove Buttons or ButtonChoices of the dashboard toolbar, you must delete thesettings described above.

Detail Screen ToolbarYou can modify the detail screen toolbar by adding or removing Buttons as well as ButtonChoicesin Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Global Customizing Process and Service Settings Navigation Settings :

1. In Define Related Object Context, check which LaunchPad Role is assigned to thecurrent context specified by Application Type, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role,and Mode.

2. If the role of step 1 fits, go directly to step 3; if not, create a new LaunchPad role in SetUp LaunchPads.

3. In Set Up LaunchPads, create or update the LaunchPad for the role identified in step 1and 2, and instance OIF. Each application in the LaunchPad represents a Button.ButtonChoices can be defined as applications with a one-level folder structure. Be sure tomaintain a unique key for the parameter Application Alias. Here, the parametersApplication Category, Namespace, Application, and System Alias specify the targetapplication. In field Appl Parameter, you can specify the name or value pairs ofparameters to be statically passed to the target application.

4. In Define Navigation Settings, create a line for each new application of the new orupdated LaunchPad. In this scenario, both attributes ACL Activity and Link Provider arerelevant.

To remove Buttons or ButtonChoices from the detail screen toolbar, you must delete thesettings described above.

Detail Screen TabsYou can modify the detail screen structure by adding or removing tabs as well as subtabs:

1. Identify the FPM Variant ID assigned to the current context (specified by ApplicationType, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role, and Mode) in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Process and Service SettingsNavigation Settings Define Object Context forNavigation .

2. Update the corresponding ABAP WD component configuration for the identified variant.Here you can add/remove/update MainViews, SubViews, and UIBBs.

3. In Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under PortfolioManagement Global Customizing Process and Service Settings NavigationSettings Define Authorizations for Detail Screen Tab Pages , you can optionallycreate a line for each tab/subtab to specify the ACL activity to be checked during tabswitch.

Page 78: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

78 October 2012

Detail Screen 'You Can Also' MenuYou can modify the You Can Also menu of the detail screens in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Process andService Settings Navigation Settings :

1. In Define Related Object Context, check which LaunchPad role is assigned to the currentcontext specified by Application Type, Portfolio Type, Object Type, Portal Role, andMode.

2. If the role of step 1 fits, go directly to step 3; if not, create a new LaunchPad role in SetUp LaunchPads.

3. In Set Up LaunchPads, create or update the LaunchPad for the role identified in steps 1and 2, and instance YCA. Be sure to maintain a unique key for parameter ApplicationAlias. Here, the parameters Application Category, Namespace, Application, and SystemAlias specify the target application. In field Appl Parameter, you can specify the name orvalue pairs of parameters to be statically passed to the target application.

4. In Define Navigation Settings, create a line for each new application of the new orupdated LaunchPad. In this scenario, both attributes ACL Activity and Link Provider arerelevant.

Link ProvidersYou can use LinkProviders to dynamically influence the navigation during runtime in fourpredefined ways:

Set application parameters

Set business parameters

Hide navigation related Buttons, ButtonChoices, and You Can Also menu links

Prevent navigation

You can set the LinkProvider for each navigation item in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Process andService Settings Navigation Settings Define Navigation Settings . A LinkProvider istechnically realized as an ABAP class which implements ABAP interfaceIF_INM_PROVIDER_INFO of package INM_UI_NAV

Navigation-Triggered Authority ChecksYou can initiate an authority check for each navigation item in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Process andService Settings Navigation Settings Define Navigation Settings by specifying the ACLactivity.

In the case of creation processes, the parent object is considered, otherwise the target object willbe taken into account.

Page 79: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 79

Setting Up Field ConfigurationProcedureThe front end of Portfolio Management can be influenced by ABAP WebDynpro Personalizationand FPM configuration:

Hiding/ShowingStandard Fields,Tables, Columnsand so on

Hiding/ShowingStandard Tabs,Toolbar Buttonsand so on

Enhance/Modify UIScreen (For example,add a custom view asanother tab, rename atab, remove a tab)

ABAP WebDynproPersonalization(user-specific or forall users)

Yes Yes No

FPM configuration(for all users) No Yes Yes

For more information about adjusting the UI for Web Dynpro ABAP, see SAP Library for SAPNetWeaver under SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability

ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI Technology Web Dynpro ABAP :

Reference End User and Administrator Personalization .

Web Dynpro ABAP: Development in Detail Advanced Concepts Personalizationand Configuration Personalization .

For details concerning FPM configuration, see Configuring Navigation [Page 75].

Assign Icons to FieldsYou assign icons to fields to help users understand the meaning of the field value.

Prerequisites

In the case of customer fields, the customer field must already be defined with the StatusManagement service attached to it. For more information, see Making Global Enhancements toPortfolio Objects [Page 42].

Procedure

In Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio ManagementGlobal Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Object Field Icons , assign an

icon for each value of the field.

If no icon is assigned for a particular value of the field and the field is displayed with thisvalue in a dashboard, this will result in an undefined status for the complete application.

Page 80: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

80 October 2012

UI Attributes and Services for FieldsYou can define the UI relevant attributes and services for fields in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global FieldSettings Check SAP Field Configuration / Define Custom Field Configuration :

In UI Configuration, you can set the visibility and state (mandatory or normal), alsowhether the field is enabled or not, and Read-only. You can also assign activities forchanging the UI attributes of the fields based on authorization. For example, if thescenario requires a field to be visible for users with Administration authorization andinvisible for others, set the attribute Visible to True for Admin, and False for others.)

The field control, which is maintained in Project Management, is taken intoaccount for phases and checklists of initiatives.

In Field Configuration, the fields can be assigned to services.

The following services are supported and can be assigned to fields in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Global Field Settings Check SAP Field Configuration / Define CustomField Configuration :

o Object link

This is used to search and select business objects, and the reference is storedwith the data.

Prerequisite: Object link type and Object link fields are already defined for detailsin Define Object Link Types.

o Questionnaire

Once you have defined that a questionnaire is available, you must also define –in the bucket – which questionnaire is assigned to the field.

Prerequisite: Questionnaire is already defined in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Process and Service Settings Define Questionnaires .

o Scoring Model

Once you have defined that a scoring model is available, you must define – in thebucket – which scoring model is assigned to the field.

Prerequisite: Scoring Model is already defined in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Process and Service Settings Define Scoring Models .

o Advanced search

This is used to search using the inserted Search Object Type. If no search objecttype is maintained, then it is assumed to be BUPA.

Page 81: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 81

o Icon enabled/ custom icon

The field is rendered as an icon.

Prerequisite: The data element of the field (when adding to the objectCustomizing structure) should be ICON_D.

o Status management

The field is rendered as a status drop-down with a corresponding icon (as withthe original status field). However, the custom status field and the standard statusfield are independent.

In order to use a service in a special object type, the service must belinked to the specified object type in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Process and Service Settings Define Services .

Business Add-Ins for FieldsYou can influence the logic for fields using the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):

/RPM/OBJECT_SERVICES: Modify the standard behavior of certain services that areavailable across most of the Portfolio Management objects. These include:

o Attribute and text consolidation in the case of parallel saves.

o Modification of object header attributes for an object.

o Modification of the field configuration.

RPM_OBJECT_SERVICES: Using the method GENERATE_EXTERNAL_ID, an externalID can be generated. To do so, a number object must be created in transaction SNRO.

RPM_BUPA_CUST_FIELDS for business partner custom fields.

/RPM/PERSON_CUST_FLD for resource custom fields.

Search Help for Custom fieldsA detailed description how to define the search help for custom fields is included in SAP Note1242010.

Page 82: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

82 October 2012

Defining Settings for Assigning ObjectsIn the standard delivery, we support the following assignments between objects in Decision FlowManagement:

Object Assignment Relationship of Objects

Item: Proj. Mgmt Project 1:1

Item : PS Project 1:1

Initiative : Item 1:1

Item: Initiative n:1

We support the following assignments between object-related subobjects:

Object Assignment Subobject Assignment Relationship ofSubobjects

Item: Proj. Mgmt Project Item DP : Proj. Mgmt Project Phase 1:n

Item : PS ProjectItem DP : PS WBS Element 1:n

Item DP : PS Network Activity 1:n

Initiative : Item Initiative DP : Item DP 1:n

Item: Initiative Item DP : Initiative DP 1:1

PrerequisitesTo use mapping of multiple subobjects for item decision points to phases, WBS elements ornetwork activities, you must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008Enhanced Capital and Resource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Global Settings Override Default Global Settings .

ProcedureFor the above listed assignments, automatic and manual mapping is available.

For manual mapping, you use the Related Objects tab on the object UI.

For automatic mapping, you must maintain a general mapping rule in Customizing of SAPPortfolio and Project Management that the system uses whenever the project is createdfrom the item or the item is created from the initiative.

For more information about the settings in the different scenarios, see

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a Proj. Mgmt Project [Page 83]

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a PS Project [Page 85]

Defining Settings for Assigning Items to Initiatives [Page 83]

Page 83: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 83

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a Proj.Mgmt ProjectIn most scenarios, the portfolio item and the operational project are just two views on the sameproject. While the item represents the strategic view on the project, the operational projectrepresents the operational view. This assignment can be represented using a link between theportfolio item and the project. An item can only be assigned to a single project. If necessary youcan also synchronize the data of the item and the project using Decision Flow Management. Thisis described in Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management [Page 88].

When you create an item, the system can automatically assign it to a project. If the project doesnot exist yet, the system can create it automatically either from scratch or based on a template.

Prerequisites You have selected the Portfolio Management indicator in Customizing for Project

Management by choosing Structure Define Project Types .

Procedure1. To allow the assignment of a Proj. Mgmt project to an item, you define this for the item

type in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under PortfolioManagement Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define PortfolioItem Types . In the Linking Item Type and Application view, in the Link to ProjectSystem column, you select the Portfolio and Project Management entry.

2. To define that the operational project is created by default when you create the item, youleave the NoAutoPro indicator blank in Customizing for Portfolio Management under

Global Customizing Portfolio Independent Settings Define Portfolio Item TypesLinking Item type and Application . You can prevent the project creation manually

during item creation by removing the Create Project on Saving indicator in the itemdetails user interface.

Settings for Automatic Assignment1. Creation using project template:

You assign Project Management project templates to an item type or to an item templateby navigating as follows:

o Item Type: Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global CustomizingPortfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Type to Project or PS .

o Item Template: Customizing for Portfolio Management under GlobalCustomizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Template to ProjectTemplate or PS Project .

3. In the Item Type to Project Template or Item Template to Project Template view,you define which project templates shall be available for project creation.

4. To define which template the system should use by default, set the Defaultindicator.

Page 84: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

84 October 2012

5. In the Decision Points to Project Phases view, you can map the decision points ofthe portfolio item to the phases of the project template in the first step.

Once you have finished this mapping, the mapped project templates are available duringitem creation.

2. Creation using project type:

You can map an item type to a project type by following the steps in the Item Type toProject Type view in Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing

Portfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Type to Project or PS .

As the project type does not define phases, you must map manually between phases anddecision points using the the Related Objects tab on the object UI.

More InformationFor more information, see Defining Settings for Assigning Objects [Page 82]

Page 85: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 85

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a PSProjectIn most scenarios, the portfolio item and the operational project are just two views on the sameproject. While the item represents the strategic view on the project, the operational projectrepresents the operational view. This assignment can be represented using a link between theportfolio item and the project. An item can only be assigned to a single project. If necessary youcan also synchronize the data of the item and the project using Decision Flow Management. Thisis described in Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management [Page 88].

When you create an item, the system can automatically assign it to a project. If the project doesnot exist yet, the system can create it automatically either from scratch or based on a template.

Procedure1. To allow the assignment of a PS project to an item, you define this for the item type in

Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio ManagementGlobal Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Portfolio Item Types .

In the Linking Item Type and Application view, in the Link to Project System column, youselect the Project System entry.

2. You define the available subobjects in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Portfolio Item Types . In the Linking Item Type andApplication view, in the WBS Element / Network Activity column, you select the WBSElement or Network Activity entry.

3. To define that the operational project is created by default when you create the item, youleave the NoAutoPro indicator blank in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing PortfolioIndependent Settings Define Portfolio Item Types Linking Item type and Application

. You can prevent the project creation manually during item creation by removing theCreate Project on Saving indicator in the item details user interface.

Settings for Automatic Assignment1. Creation using PS project as a template:

You assign a PS project that is used as a template to an item type or to an item templateby navigating as follows:

o Item Type: Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global CustomizingPortfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Type to Project or PS .

o Item Template: Customizing for Portfolio Management under GlobalCustomizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Template to ProjectTemplate or PS Project .

3. In the Item Type to PS Project or Item Template to PS Project view, you definewhich PS project shall be available for project creation.

4. To define which template the system should use by default, set the Defaultindicator.

Page 86: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

86 October 2012

5. You must determine the SAP ERP system to be used for integration into PS bychoosing an entry in the Object Type column.

6. In the subviews (Item Type DP to PS WBS Element, Item Type DP to PSNetwork Activity, Item Template DP to PS WBS Element, Item Template DP toPS Network Activity), you define the mapping of item type decision points (DP) oritem template DP to PS WBS elements or PS network activities of the selectedPS project (depending on your selection on item type level).

Once you have finished this mapping, the mapped PS projects are available during itemcreation.

2. Creation using project profile:

You can map an item type to a project profile by following the steps in Item Type to PSProfile view in Customizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing

Portfolio-Independent Settings Map Item Type to Project or PS .

As the project profile does not define WBS elements or network activities, you must mapmanually between WBS elements or network activites on one hand and decision pointson the other hand using the the Related Objects tab on the object UI.

Checking Delivered Assignment SettingsIf you have not made any setting as mentioned above, the system uses the default Customizingdelivered by SAP. You can display the delivered Customzing under Global Settings CheckGlobal Settings . Then select 0009 Portfolio Item Project Integration 0007 Default PSProject Type .

More InformationFor more information, see

Defining Settings for Assigning Objects [Page 82]

Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management [Page 88].

Page 87: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 87

Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to anInitiativeAn initiative represents a real-life initiative within your company. For example, a new productinitiative represents all phases of discovering, designing, developing, go to market, andmaintenance of a single product. An initiative can consists of several individual projects which aremanaged as portfolio items. In addition, the decision points of initiatives can be mapped to thedecision points of the assigned items.

ProcedureAutomatic assignment

1. For each initiative type, you need to define which decision points of the initiative type aremapped to the decision points of an item type. To do this, you specify the item type inCustomizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing PortfolioIndependent Settings Define Initiative Types Select Item of Initiative Type .

To map per item type the decision points between item type and initiative type, go toCustomizing for Portfolio Management under Global Customizing PortfolioIndependent Settings Define Initiative Types Select Item of Initiative Type MapDecision Points .

2. In the initiative UI, you use the Assigned Items view to:

o Assign existing items to the initiative.

o Create and assign new items to the initiative.

The decision points are mapped automatically when creating or assigning theitem.

3. You can review the mapping in the Related Objects tab of the initiative.

Manual assignmentNo further steps in the Customizing are necessary. You use the Related Objects tab in theinitiative UI to assign the item and its decision points.

More InformationFor more information, see Defining Settings for Assigning Objects [Page 82]

Page 88: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

88 October 2012

Defining Settings for Decision Flow ManagementDecision Flow Management (DFM) provides assignments which allow the synchronization ofattributes, authorizations and statuses between application objects when you save.

Synchronization TypesThere are two types of synchronization – horizontal synchronization and vertical synchronization:

Horizontal synchronization:

You synchronize objects that belong to different applications, for example an item andproject. The horizontal synchronization supports synchronization of status, attributes, andauthorization.

Vertical synchronization:

You synchronize objects that belong to the same application, for example, an item andinitiative.

Standard SetupIn the standard setup, the following object links are supported:

Project Management project

Project Management phase

Initiative: Decision point

Initiative

Initiative: Phase

Item

Item: Decision point

PS Project Definition

PS WBS Element

This means that you can create assignments between two objects of the above object types andsynchronize the data between them.

PrerequisitesAttribute SynchronizationTo use mapping functions, you must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008Enhanced Capital and Resource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing forSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Global Settings Override Default Global Settings .

Page 89: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 89

You can define mapping functions to determine the value of a field on the target object in casethere are multiple source objects. For example, you have mapped two network activities (source)to a decision point (target) and you want to synchronize the start dates. You can use theMinimum mapping function to map the earliest start date to the decision point start date.

1. You define the mapping functions in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Attribute Synchronization Maintain Mapping Functions .

2. You implement the logic for your custom mapping functions as maintained in Customizingactivity Maintain Mapping Functions or you change the result of the standard mappingfunctions in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under CommonFunctions Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) BAdI: Mapping to Target Object Fields .

ProcedureThis guide focuses on the most common scenarios and their configuration:

Scenario A) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Project Management Project [Page 90]

Scenario B) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Initiative [Page 96]

Scenario C) Synchronize Portfolio Item and PS Project [Page 100]

All synchronization processes require that the two objects that you want to synchronize areassigned to each other. For all scenarios, the assignment can be done manually in the ManageRelated tab.

For certain scenarios, automated assignment is provided. For project and item assignment, seeDefining Settings for Assigning an Item to a Proj. Mgmt Project [Page 83]. For initiative and itemassignment, see Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to an Initiative [Page 87]. For portfolioitem and PS project assignment, see Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a PS Project[Page 85].

Page 90: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

90 October 2012

Scenario A) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Proj.Mgmt ProjectIn most scenarios, the portfolio item and the operational project are just two views on the sameproject. While the item represents the strategic view on the project, the operational projectrepresents the operational view. This assignment can be represented using a link between theportfolio item and the project. An item can only be assigned to a single project, the decision pointsof the item can be linked to phases of the project.

The following steps describe an example of a configuration. Depending on the particularrequirements other configuration may be required. In the example it is assumed that the item ismapped to the Project Management project and the project is automatically created along withthe item. The decision points of the item are linked to the phases.

During creation the following attributes should be synchronized:

Name to Project Name

Item Planned Start/Finish to Project Must Start On/Must Finish On Date

Item Authorizations to Project Authorizations

Item Decision Point Planned Start/Finish to Project Phase Must Start On/Must Finish OnDate.

During execution of the project, updates of the project shall also update the item data. Thefollowing attributes should be synchronized:

Project Calculated Start/Finish to Item Forecast Start/Finish

Project Phases Calculated Start/Finish to Item Decision Point Forecast Start/Finish

PrerequisitesYou have executed Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a Proj. Mgmt Project [Page 83].

Procedure

Note

Instead of creating or changing Customizing settings in single Customizing activities, you cancheck and maintain multiple settings for Decision Flow Management for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Check andMaintain Settings for DFM .

Define General Settings1. Check that the object link types are maintained in SAP Portfolio and Project

Management Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Define DFMObject Link Types:

o 0INMCPROJECT: Project

Page 91: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 91

o 0INMCPROPHASE: Project Phase

o 0INMITEM: Item

o 0INMITEMDP: Item Decision Point

2. Maintain the mapping for synchronization in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Maintain Objects for Synchronization . Here you define the target and the sourceobject for synchronization. Check that the following entries are maintained:

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Target Grouping: PDCP Project Definition

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Target Grouping: PPCP Project Phase

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PDCP Project Definition

Target Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPCP Project Phase

Target Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Inactive: false

3. How the synchronization takes place is defined in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Define Execution Mode for Synchronization of Objects . Here you can define whetherthe synchronization happens synchronously or asynchronously. For the describedscenario the synchronous mode is used, so all required scenarios are already part of thedelivery Customizing.

In case you need to add asynchronous scenarios, you must maintain the table found inSAP Portfolio and Project Management Common Functions Decision Flow

Management Settings Define Customer-Specific Execution Mode for Synchronization.

Page 92: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

92 October 2012

Define Settings for Attribute Synchronization1. This scenario synchronizes different data from the item to the project upon creation,

rather than upon update. To achieve this, you define scenario IDs in SAP Portfolio andProject Management Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Attribute Synchronization Define Scenario ID .

Check that the following entries are available:

o Initial Create

o Horizontal Synchronization

The Scenario IDs are used to be able to define different field mappings.

2. In this step you define which mapping is used for the action. For example, you want touse the Initial Create scenario when creating a new item and the Horizontal Synchroni-zation scenario when changing the item. In this scenario, the following entries arerequired in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Attribute Synchronization MaintainAttributes for Synchronization Scenarios :

o Source Grouping: Portfolio Item

Target Grouping: Project Definition

Oper./Sync.: Create Target Object and Synchronize

Scenario ID: Initial Create

o Source Grouping: Project Definition

Target Grouping: Portfolio Item

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

o Source Grouping: Project Phase

Target Grouping: Portfolio Item Decision Point

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

3. You define which attributes of the objects are mapped in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Common Functions Decision Flow ManagementSettings Attribute Synchronization Maintain Field Mappings .

To support the scenario, map the following fields:

For main grouping Item, Subgrouping Item:

Map Item to Project Definition

Page 93: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 93

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

InitialCreate

PROJ_DESCRIPTION PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt )

PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt)

DESCRIPTION

InitialCreate

PLANNED_START PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt )

PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt)

MUST_START_ON_DATE

InitialCreate

PLANNED_FINISH PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt )

PDCP

ProjectDefinition(ProjectMgmt)

MUST_FINISH_ON_DATE

For main grouping Item, Subgrouping Portfolio Item Decision Point:

Map Item Decision Point to Project Phase

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

InitialCreate

PLANNED_START PPCP

Phase(ProjectMgmt)

PPCPPhase(ProjectMgmt)

MUST_START_ON_DATE

InitialCreate

PLANNED_FINISH PPCP

Phase(ProjectMgmt)

PPCPPhase(ProjectMgmt)

MUST_FINISH_ON_DATE

For main grouping Project, Subgrouping Phase:

Map Project Phase to Item Decision Point

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

CALCULATED_EARLY_FINISH

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_FINISH

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

CALCULATED_EARLY_START

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_START

Page 94: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

94 October 2012

For main grouping Project, Subgrouping Project:

Map Project to Item

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

CALCULATED_START_DATE

PPO PortfolioItem PPO Portfolio

Item

FORECAST_START

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

CALCULATED_FINISH_DATE

PPO PortfolioItem PPO Portfolio

Item

FORECAST_FINISH

Define Settings for Authorization SynchronizationYou define which authorization activities are used in DFM, and for which mappings theauthorizations are taken into account. In SAP Portfolio and Project Management CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Authorization Synchronization MaintainDFM Activities Maintain DFM Activities . In SAP Portfolio and Project Management

Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Authorization SynchronizationMaintain DFM ActivitiesMap Authorizations for Synchronization , you define which

authorizations are taken into account during synchronization.

For this scenario, all authorizations are copied from the item to the project during creation. Addingor removing authorization holders from the item is also copied over to the project. Authorizationchanges to the project are not reflected in the item.

PPO Portfolio Item PDCP Project Definition Admin

PPO Portfolio Item PDCP Project Definition NoAuth

PPO Portfolio Item PDCP Project Definition Read

PPO Portfolio Item PDCP Project Definition ResMan

PPO Portfolio Item PDCP Project Definition Write

Deletion of Authorizations (see also SAP Note 1170079):

When you delete the authorization for a user in the source object, the deletion of theauthorization for the target is not supported. For example, a user has read authorizationfor an item, and this authorization is inherited from the project. If you delete theauthorization for the item, the authorization for the project will not be deleted. Instead,you should set the authorization for the source object to None, which will then be copiedover to the target object.

Page 95: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 95

Inheritance of Authorizations (see also SAP Note 1249825):

Inherited authorizations are not synchronized. For example, when the mapping ismaintained to synchronize the authorizations between an item and a project, only thosemappings that are maintained explicitly for the item will be transferred to the linkedproject.

Define Settings for Status SynchronizationPortfolio and project management use a different status management. In case you want tosynchronize the status between an item and a project, you must define a common status. This isdone using the business transactions.

1. You define the business transactions which are used to define status change in SAPPortfolio and Project Management Common Functions Decision Flow ManagementSettings Status Synchronization Synchronous and Asynchronous Status Synchroni-zation Maintain DFM Business Transactions .

2. You define which business transactions are relevant for which target and source object inSAP Portfolio and Project Management Common Functions Decision Flow

Management Settings Status Synchronization Synchronous and AsynchronousStatus Synchronization Map Business Transactions for Synchronization .

3. In case the project is the source object for status synchronization, you map the projectstatus to DFM business transaction in SAP Portfolio and Project Management

Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Status SynchronizationSynchronous and Asynchronous Status SynchronizationMap Project / Initiative

Business Transaction to DFM Business Transaction .

4. In case the project is the target for status synchronization, you map the DFM businesstransaction to the project status in SAP Portfolio and Project Management CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Status Synchronization

Synchronous and Asynchronous Status Synchronization Map DFM BusinessTransaction to Project / Initiative Business Transaction .

5. In case the item is the source object for status synchronization, you map the item statusto DFM business transaction in SAP Portfolio and Project Management CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Status Synchronization

Synchronous and Asynchronous Status Synchronization Map Portfolio ManagementStatus to DFM Business Transaction .

6. In case the item is the target for status synchronization, you map the DFM businesstransaction to the item status in SAP Portfolio and Project Management CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Status Synchronization

Synchronous and Asynchronous Status Synchronization Map DFM BusinessTransaction to Portfolio Management Status .

Page 96: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

96 October 2012

Scenario B) Synchronize Portfolio Item and InitiativeAn initiative groups several projects represented by items that run in your organization. The itemsare linked to the initiative and the item decision points are linked to initiative decision points.

The following steps describe an example of a configuration. Depending on the particularrequirements other configuration may be required. For details on status and authorizationsynchronization, see Scenario A) Synchronize Portfolio Item and Proj. Mgmt Project [Page 90].

In the example, it is assumed that the item is mapped to an initiative. The decision points of theitem are linked to the decision points of the initiative.

During the update of the initiative decision point, the following attributes should be synchronizedto the item decision points:

Initiative DP Forecast Start/Finish to Item DP Planned Start/Finish

During the update of the item decision points the following attributes should be synchronized tothe initiative decision points:

Earliest Item DP Planned Start to Initiative DP Planned Start

Latest Item DP Planned Finish to Initiative DP Planned Finish

Earliest Item DP Actual Start to Initiative DP Actual Start

Latest Item DP Actual Finish to Initiative DP Actual Finish

PrerequisitesYou have performed all the steps in Define Settings for Assigning an Item to an Initiative [Page87].

Procedure

Note

Instead of creating or changing Customizing settings in single Customizing activities, you cancheck and maintain multiple settings for Decision Flow Management for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Check andMaintain Settings for DFM .

Define General Settings1. Check that the following object link types are maintained in SAP Portfolio and Project

Management Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Define DFMObject Link Types:

o 0INMINIATIVE: Initiative

o 0INMINITDP: Initiative Decision Point

Page 97: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 97

o 0INMITEM: Item

o 0INMITEMDP: Item Decision Point

2. Maintain the mapping for synchronization in SAP Portfolio and Project ManagementCommon Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Maintain Objects for Syn-

chronization . Here you define the target and the source object for synchronization.Check that the following entries are maintained:

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Target Grouping: INITIATIVE Initiative

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Target Grouping: INITDP Initiative: Decision Point

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: INITIATIVE Initiative

Target Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: INITDP Initiative: Decision Point

Target Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Inactive: false

3. How the synchronization takes place is defined in SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings DefineExecution Mode for Synchronization of Objects .

Here you can define whether the synchronization happens synchronously orasynchronously. For the described scenario, the synchronous mode is used, so allrequired scenarios are already part of the delivery Customizing. In case you need toadjust – that is, add asynchronous scenarios – you need to maintain the table found in

SAP Portfolio and Project Management Common Functions Decision FlowManagement Settings Define Customer-Specific Execution Mode for Synchronization

.

Page 98: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

98 October 2012

Define Settings for Attribute Synchronization1. In the scenario we want to synchronize the forecast dates from the initiative decision

points to the items decision points upon update. The planned dates and the actual datesare copied from the items decision points upon update.

To achieve this, the following entries are maintained in SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings AttributeSynchronization Maintain Attributes for Synchronization Scenarios :

o Source Grouping: Portfolio Initiative Decision Point

Target Grouping: Portfolio Item Decision Point

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

o Source Grouping: Portfolio Item Decision Point

Target Grouping: Portfolio Initiative Decision Point

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

2. You define which attributes of the objects are mapped in SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings AttributeSynchronization Maintain Field Mappings .

To support the scenario, map the following fields:

For main grouping Initiative, Subgrouping Initiative Decision Point:

Map Initiative Decision Point to Item Decision Point

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

HorizontalSynchro-nization

FORECAST_START

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_START

HorizontalSynchro-nization

FORECAST_FINISH

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_FINISH

Page 99: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 99

For main grouping Item, sub grouping Item Decision Point:

Map Item Decision Point to Initiative Decision Point

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrou-ping

TargetMainGrou-pingName

TargetSub-grou-ping

TargetSub-grou-pingName

TargetField Function

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

PLANNED_START

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

PLANNED_START

Minimum

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

PLANNED_FINISH

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

PLANNED_FINISH

Maximum

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

ACTUAL_START

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

ACTUAL_START Minimum

HorizontalSynchroni-zation

ACTUAL_FINISH

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

INITDPInitiative:DecisionPoint

ACTUAL_FINISH Maximum

Page 100: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

100 October 2012

Scenario C) Synchronize Portfolio Item and PSProjectIn most scenarios, the portfolio item and the operational project are just two views on the sameproject. While the item represents the strategic view on the project, the operational projectrepresents the operational view. This assignment can be represented using a link between theportfolio item and the project. An item can only be assigned to a single project, the decision pointsof the item can be linked to WBS elements or Network Activities of the project.

The following steps describe an example of a configuration. Depending on the particularrequirements other configuration may be required.

In the example it is assumed that the item is mapped to the PS project and the project isautomatically created along with the item. The decision points of the item are linked to the WBSelements.

During creation the following attributes should be synchronized:

Name to Project Name

Item Decision Point Plan Start/Finish to WBS Element Basic Start/Finish

During execution of the project, updates of the project shall also update the item data. Thefollowing attributes should be synchronized:

WBS Elements Forecast Start/Finish to Item Decision Point Forecast Start/Finish

PrerequisitesYou have executed Defining Settings for Assigning an Item to a PS Project [Page 85].

Procedure

Note

Instead of creating or changing Customizing settings in single Customizing activities, you cancheck and maintain multiple settings for Decision Flow Management for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings Check andMaintain Settings for DFM .

Define General Settings1. Check that the following object link types are maintained in Customizing for SAP Portfolio

and Project Management under Common Functions Decision Flow ManagementSettings Define DFM Object Link Types:

o 0INMITEM: Item

o 0INMITEMDP: Item Decision Point

o 0INMPSPD: PS Project Definition

o 0INMPSWBS: PS WBS Element

Page 101: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 101

2. Maintain the mapping for synchronization in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Maintain Objects for Synchronization . Here you define the target and the sourceobject for synchronization. Check that the following entries are maintained:

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Target Grouping: PD Project Definition

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Target Grouping: PR WBS Element (PS)

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PD Project Definition (PS)

Target Grouping: PPO Portfolio Item

Inactive: false

o Category: 0INMDFM Common Functions

Source Grouping: PR WBS Element (PS)

Target Grouping: PPODP Portfolio Item Decision Point

Inactive: false

3. How the synchronization takes place is defined in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Common Functions Decision Flow Management Settings

Define Execution Mode for Synchronization of Objects .

Here you can define whether the synchronization happens synchronously orasynchronously. For the described scenario, the synchronous mode is used, so allrequired scenarios are already part of the delivery Customizing. In case you need toadjust – that is, add asynchronous scenarios – you need to maintain the table found inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Common Functions

Decision Flow Management Settings Define Customer-Specific Execution Mode forSynchronization .

Define Settings for Attribute Synchronization1. This scenario synchronizes different data from the item to the project upon creation,

rather than upon update. To achieve this, you define scenario IDs in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Common Functions Decision FlowManagement Settings Attribute Synchronization Define Scenario ID .

Page 102: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

102 October 2012

Check that the following entries are available:

o Initial Create

o Horizontal Synchronization

The Scenario IDs are used to be able to define different field mappings.

2. In this step you define which mapping is used for the action. For example, you want touse the Initial Create scenario when creating a new item and the Horizontal Synchroni-zation scenario when changing the item. In this scenario, the following entries arerequired in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under CommonFunctions Decision Flow Management Settings Attribute Synchronization MaintainAttributes for Synchronization Scenarios :

o Source Grouping: Portfolio Item

Target Grouping: Project Definition (PS)

Oper./Sync.: Create Target Object and Synchronize

Scenario ID: Initial Create

o Source Grouping: Project Definition

Target Grouping: Portfolio Item

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

o Source Grouping: WBS Element (PS)

Target Grouping: Portfolio Item Decision Point

Oper./Sync.: Update

Scenario ID: Horizontal Synchronization

3. You define which attributes of the objects are mapped in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Common Functions Decision Flow ManagementSettings Attribute Synchronization Maintain Field Mappings .

To support the scenario, map the following fields:

For main grouping Item, Subgrouping Item:

Map Item to Project Definition (PS)

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

InitialCreate

PROJ_DESCRIPTION

PDProjectDefinition(PS)

PDProjectDefinition(PS)

DESCRIPTION

Page 103: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 103

For main grouping Item, Subgrouping Portfolio Item Decision Point

Map Item Decision Point to WBS Element

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

InitialCreate

PLAN_START PR

WBSElement(PS)

PRWBSElement(PS)

WBS_BASIC_START_DATE

InitialCreate

PLAN_FINISH PR

WBSElement(PS)

PRWBSElement(PS)

WBS_BASIC_FINISH_DATE

For main grouping Project, Subgrouping WBS Element (PS)

Map WBS Element to Item Decision Point

ScenarioID

SourceField

TargetMainGrouping

TargetMainGroupingName

TargetSubgrou-ping

TargetSubgrou-pingName

TargetField

HorizontalSynchro-nization

WBS_FORECAST_START_DATE

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_START

HorizontalSynchro-nization

WBS_FORECAST_FINISH_DATE

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

PPODP

PortfolioItemDecisionPoint

FORECAST_FINISH

Page 104: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

104 October 2012

Metrics Management with Portfolio ManagementIn Metrics Management, you can enter key figures (metrics), which you define according to yourrequirements, either manually or by allowing them to be calculated by the system. The calculationof the key figures is technically done using the key figure monitor. The metrics can be defined asavailable per object type (for example, a metric is common for all the items that you have in theportfolio), or as available for a certain item or initiative type (for example, a metric may benecessary only for development projects).

ProcedureConfigure Metrics

1. You define the object type that should support metrics in SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Metrics Management Define Object Types

.

In standard portfolio management, only item (RIH) and initiative (IPO) are supported.

2. You can define groups of metrics in SAP Portfolio and Project Management underCommon Functions Metrics Management Define Metrics Groups . Members of a

metrics group have the same data type (date, currency quantity) and the same set ofvalues (actual, target, and so on) for an object type. On the UI, each metrics group will berendered as a single table. Each metric that is assigned to the metrics group is a row inthe table.

3. You can reduce the number of available currencies and units per object type in SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Common Functions Metrics Management

Define Currencies SAP Portfolio and Project Management Common FunctionsMetrics Management Define Quantities .

4. You define the specific metrics in SAP Portfolio and Project Management underCommon Functions Metrics Management Define Metrics . Within this step, you

also assign the metric to a single metric group.

5. You define the metrics value types in SAP Portfolio and Project Management underCommon Functions Metrics Management Define Metrics Value Types .

6. You assign the value types to metrics groups in SAP Portfolio and Project Managementunder Common Functions Metrics Management Assign Metrics Value Type toMetrics .

This means that the value types (such as actual, forecast, and planned) are available forall the metrics that are assigned to this group. For value types that are linked to keyfigures, you can define whether a status and trend icon will be displayed. This flag is nottaken into account for value types that are not linked to key figures.

7. You can create metric independent groups, which are displayed in a drop-down list in themetrics UI. The groups can be defined in SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Common Functions Metrics Management Define Metrics-Independent Groups

The metric independent groups are used only for reporting purposes.

Page 105: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 105

Configure the Key Figure MonitorKey figure values for key figures are calculated from reports. In the Customizing for Key FigureMonitor, you assign the reports and variants of these reports to define the calculation logic. For adetailed description of the individual steps see the IMG.

1. You define key figure groups per object type — Item (RIH) or Initiative (IPO) — in SAPPortfolio and Project Management under

Portfolio Management Global Customizing Process and Service Settings KeyFigure Monitor Define Key Figure Groups .

The group is used to group key figures in the key figure monitor.

2. In these steps in SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio ManagementGlobal Customizing , you define the calculation and the display options for the key

figures:

o Process and Service Settings Key Figure Monitor Define Key Figures .

o Define Aggregation Logic for Objects.

o Define Threshold Values for Objects.

o Process and Service Settings Key Figure Monitor Assign Key Figure toMetrics and Metrics Value Types .

o BAdI: Threshold Values for Key Figure Monitor (0XRPM_BADI_THRESHOLD).

Configure the Visibility of the MetricsAfter you have defined the metrics as described in the previous steps, they will be visible for allobjects of a certain object type. The following steps describe how you can restrict the visibility of aitem or initiative type:

1. Select the flag Disable Global Metric for the metric in SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Metrics Management Define Metrics .After that, the metric will no longer be visible for all objects.

2. Activate the metric groups, the metrics, and the metric value types for a specified itemtype in SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Portfolio Independent Settings Define Portfolio Item Types :

o Metrics Group.

o Metrics.

o Metrics Value Types.

3. You activate the metric groups, the metrics and the metric value types for a specifiedinitiative type in SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Global Customizing Portfolio Independent Settings Define Initiative Types :

o Metrics Group.

o Metrics.

o Metrics Value Types.

Page 106: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

106 October 2012

Add Metrics to DashboardsYou can add metrics for an object type to the dashboard of an object. In case you have defineditem or initiative type-dependent metrics, they can also be added to the dashboard; however, therelated cells in the dashboard will remain empty for items or initiatives of a different type.

1. Add the metrics and the associated value type to the dashboard per dashboard context inSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Global Field Settings Dashboard Settings Define Fields forDashboards Dashboard Metric Fields per Context .

The context can include the parent object type (for example, if you are starting the itemdashboard in the context of a bucket UI), the portal role, or the portfolio type. You canalso choose whether the status and the trend icon should be visible in the dashboardusing the flags:

o Display Status

o Display Trend

Whether the metrics unit is included or not can be defined using the flag Metrics Unit.

2. If required, you can overwrite the column header that is displayed in the dashboard inSAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Global Field Settings Dashboard Settings Define Fields forDashboards Alternative Column Header for Metrics in Dashboard .

Page 107: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 107

Financial and Capacity PlanningYou use financial and capacity planning to store and plan financial and capacity data for yourproject, as well as maintain actual cost data. You can maintain financial and capacity planningdata for a bucket, item, and initiative.

You can view financial and capacity data on the following levels:

Category

A category is a set of financial or capacity planning groups that logically belong together.

Group

A group is a particular aspect of a project for which you carry out financial or capacityplanning. You maintain financial and capacity data for a group using views (such asplanned costs).

View

A view relates to a specific aspect of a group. You define views for items, initiatives, andbuckets. The views you define are available for all groups within a category.

Financial and capacity planning data can be either maintained directly in the PortfolioManagement system or uploaded from an Financials and Controlling system (SAP ERP system).

To transfer costs to SAP Portfolio and Project Management, you can execute either one of thefollowing reports:

RPM_FICO_DATA_TRANSFER in the SAP ERP system

/RPM/FICO_INT_PLANNING in the SAP Portfolio and Project Management system

PrerequisitesIf data from the Financials and Controlling system is to be uploaded to the Portfolio Managementsystem, the following settings are required.

To decide if you can use RFC or ALE, see SAP Note 1427779.

Using Remote Function Call (RFC) Destination1. Define RFC Connections:

o From Financials and Controlling system to the Portfolio Management system

o From Portfolio Management system to the Financials and Controlling system.

2. Double check that object link types for retrieving cost from CO system exist and areconfigured for application SAPCO. For more information, see Setting Up Object Links[Page 71].

Page 108: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

108 October 2012

3. If child elements that belong to object link types of SAP Product Lifecycle Management –Project System (PLM PS) are to be taken into account, set the flag Process ChildElements for these object link types in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Financialand Controlling Integration SAP Portfolio and Project Management SystemCustomizing for SAP FI-CO Financial Object Link Types for Hierarchical Processing .

4. Define the following in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management underPortfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings :

o Capacity Units

o Currency Units

o Period Types

5. Customize Portf.and Proj. Mgmt Value Type in the Customizing for the relevant ERPsystem under Integration with Other mySAP.com Components SAP Portfolio andProject Management Portfolio Management .

Using Application Link Enabling (ALE)1. Define RFC Connections, Logical Ports, Logical Systems:

o From Financials and Controlling system to the Portfolio Management system.

o From Portfolio Management system to the Financials and Controlling system.

2. Configure partner profiles in SAP Menu under Tools ALE ALE AdministrationRuntime Settings

o In Financials and Controlling System: partner profile with “RPMFIF” messagetype using RPMINTF1 IDOC type as outbound parameter

o In Portfolio Management system: partner profile with “RPMFIF” message typeusing RPMF process code as inbound parameter.

3. In the Financials and Controlling system, set up the ALE integration (including generationof partner profile) between the Financials and Controlling system and the PortfolioManagement system in Customizing under SAP Netweaver Base IDOC Interface(ALE) Modelling and Implementing Business Processes Maintain Distribution Modeland Distribute Views .

4. Ensure that the organization type COA is maintained for the application SAPCO inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management

Base System Interfaces SAP Financial and Controlling Integration SAP Portfolioand Project Management System Customizing for SAP FI-CO .

5. Double check that object link types for retrieving cost from CO system exist and areconfigured for application SAPCO. For more information, see Setting Up Object Links[Page 71].

6. If child elements that belong to object link types of SAP Product Lifecycle Management –Project System (PLM PS) are to be taken into account, set the flag Process ChildElements for these object link types in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Financial

Page 109: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 109

and Controlling Integration SAP Portfolio and Project Management SystemCustomizing for SAP FI-CO Financial Object Link Types for Hierarchical Processing .

7. Define the following in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management underPortfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings :

o Capacity Units

o Currency Units

o Period Types

8. Customize Portf.and Proj. Mgmt Value Type in the Customizing for the relevant ERPsystem under Integration with Other mySAP.com Components SAP Portfolio andProject Management Portfolio Management .

For more information, see Setting Up ALE between SAP Portf. and Proj. Mgmt and FI/CO [Page58]

Procedure1. Define financial and capacity categories and groups in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and

Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity Categories .

2. Define financial and capacity views in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity Views .

In this activity you also define how the financial and capacity data is rolled up from item toinitiative and from item / initiative to bucket. For example, you can specify that the data ofitems assigned to an initiative can first be rolled up to the initiative and from there to thebucket, or if the data of the Item is directly rolled up to the bucket. You can also definewhether a view is available for item, or initiative, or bucket or all these objects.

3. Define which financial and capacity views are displayed in the front-end in Customizingfor SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management GlobalCustomizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity Views forFront-End Configuration .

The View definition should reflect cost perspective and the way data rollup shouldoccur.

Maintain the IDs of the Categories, Groups, and Views in the same sequence asyou want it to be displayed in the front-end.

If you add categories or groups after Item and Bucket creation, run the report/RPM/PLAN_INT_PREP. In general it is strongly recommended to avoid changesin the Customizing after Item, Initiative or Bucket creation.

Page 110: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

110 October 2012

4. Define how the financial and capacity planning data is filled from the different sources(SAP ERP system, Project Management) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under:

o Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces Financial PlanningDefine Financial Planning Setting and

o Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces Capacity Planning DefineCapacity Planning Setting

To prevent multiplication of the data, take care that one dataset is not aggregatedinto several categories or groups or views (because of, for example, overlappingranges of cost elements).

With report RPM_CONFIGURATION_TEST, you can check the consistency ofthe customizing across the customizing activities that are relevant to financialintegration.

If the data is retrieved from SAP ERP system, the maintained currencyconversion rates should be the same in both the SAP ERP and PortfolioManagement systems.

5. Assign financial and capacity planning settings to portfolio types in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Portfolio-Dependent Settings Define Financial Capacity Settings for Portfolio Types.

Page 111: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 111

Defining Settings for Assigning a Resource to aBucketYou can assign capacity to a bucket in Portfolio Management as follows:

On the Bucket Details screen, you can assign resources to a bucket and you can displaythe capacity amount mapped to individual view/category/group combinations. You canalso derive the financial planning values from the assigned capacity.

On the Resource Details screen, you can display the buckets to which the resource hasbeen assigned. You can navigate to the bucket or portfolio by choosing a link in the table.

To assign capacity to a bucket, you can import Microsoft Excel data by executing theRPM_DX_RES_ASSIGN report.

PrerequisitesYou must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008 Enhanced Capital andResource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings OverrideDefault Global Settings .

Procedure1. Select the Capacity Assignment entry as bucket process for a particular view in

Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Portfolio ManagementGlobal Customizing Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity

Views Define Capacity View .

2. To enable labor cost planning for the assigned resources, select the CapacityAssignment entry as bucket process for a particular view in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity Views DefineFinancial View .

3. Define the labor cost rates in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Managementunder Project Management Connection to External Systems AccountingIntegration Define Financial and Capacity Views Define Cost/Revenue Rates .

Page 112: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

112 October 2012

Defining Settings for Fiscal Year PlanningYou can define and display data in fiscal year format and use the fiscal year variant for planning afiscal year.

Financial Period BreakdownFor financial and capacity planning, a specific period breakdown according to the fiscal yeardefinition is supported.

Year to Date ValuesIf you have activated the fiscal year planning, the year-to-date values represent the values fromthe first periods (P1) of the current fiscal year until the current period.

Exchange RatesIf you have activated the fiscal year planning, the system uses one exchange rate per periodduring the import from SAP ERP. To determine the exchange rate, the system uses the first dayof the period.

PrerequisitesTo use fiscal year planning, you must have switched on the following:

1. 0002 Master Switch 0008 Enhanced Capital and Resource Mgmt Switch (see SAPNote 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings Override DefaultGlobal Settings .

2. 0010 Portfolio Item FI/CO Planning and Integration 0006 Fiscal Year Switch (seeSAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings Override DefaultGlobal Settings .

3. If you would like to use a default fiscal year variant for processing, you must have set thevalue 0010 Portfolio Item FI/CO Planning and Integration 0007 Default Fiscal yearvariant (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings

Override Default Global Settings .

Procedure1. You define fiscal year variants in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management

under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings Maintain FiscalYear Variant .

2. You define the used fiscal year variant on the portfolio level in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Portfolio-Dependent Settings Define Portfolio Types .

Page 113: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 113

In case financial values are being imported from the SAP ERP system by linkinga portfolio item to a PS project element, the fiscal year variant used for the PSproject element and the portfolio item must be the same.

If you use several Controlling areas, for example if you have connected severalSAP ERP systems, then you only can import into the portfolio if the fiscal yearvariants of the Controlling areas are the same.

Migration ReportsIf you have switched on 0010 Portfolio Item FI/CO Planning and Integration 0006 Fiscal YearSwitch (see SAP Note 1457426) , you must use the /RPM/MIGRATION_CAL_TO_FISCALreport to transfer the values from calendar year format to fiscal year format. If you want to copythe fiscal year variants from the SAP ERP system, you can use the/RPM/FISCAL_VARIANT_COPY report.

Page 114: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

114 October 2012

Defining Settings for Transfer to SAP ERPYou can transfer planning data of a portfolio item to a planning element on an SAP ERP system.

On the Financial Planning screen of an item, you can click on the Transfer to SAP ERP button toinitiate the transfer. Transfer is allowed if the item has a PS project or a WBS element linked to it.If a PS project is linked to the item, the top level WBS element of this project will be the assignedplanning element. If the item is not linked to a PS project, but is linked to a WBS element, thisWBS element will be the assigned planning element. Data from the selected views will betransferred to this planning element.

PrerequisitesYou must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008 Enhanced Capital andResource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings OverrideDefault Global Settings .

Procedure1. Define a transfer type for a portfolio type in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project

Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing PortfolioDependent Settings Define Portfolio Types . The transfer type that you select for aportfolio type is applicable to all the items under a portfolio of this type.

2. Define financial views for budget or planned cost transfer in the Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Portfolio-Independent Settings Define Financial and Capacity Views . If you haveset a view in the Amount Type for Transfer column to Planned Cost Transfer, youhave to select a CO Version which is used in the data transfer.

Page 115: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 115

Defining Search Help for Portfolio ManagementIn this procedure, you can define the Search Help for Portfolio Management.

ProcedureYou can modify the Customizing supplied in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Common Functions Search Define Search Help for PortfolioManagement .

The default settings are provided in the Customizing client. We recommend that you copy thecontent of this Customizing activity from the Customizing.

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 116: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

116 October 2012

Resource ManagementResource Management in the area of Portfolio Management requires Project Managementfunctionality as a prerequisite.

FeaturesResources are represented by business partners. Business partners can be created manually orby integrating HR. For details on creating business partners [External], see the ProjectManagement configuration guide. Manual creation is described in Setting Up Business Partners[External]. Creation using HCM Integration is described in Setting Up Project Management withHCM in SAP PLM [External]

Portfolio Management offers a view for resources and one view for staffing. In the resources view,you will see those resources for which you are assigned as:

Staffing manager for the organizational unit.

Candidate manager for the organizational unit.

Resource manager for the resource pool.

In the staffing view, you will see only those projects and roles for which you are assigned as:

Staffing manager for the role.

Candidate manager for the role.

Resource manager for the project.

For details on how to define the staffing and the candidate manager, see the ProjectManagement configuration guide. Creating Candidate Manager and Staffing Manager [External]describes how to create the organizational structures and how to assign staffing and candidatemanagers. The information about CRM is not relevant for Portfolio Management ResourceManagement views.

To improve the performance, you can buffer the availability data for business partners. For moredetails see Buffering Availability Data of Business Partners [External] in the Project ManagementConfiguration Guide.

Page 117: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 117

Distributed Content ServerSAP provides content servers (CS) as standard technology for storing files. Unlike the WebApplication Server (WAS) database, content servers are optimized for storing files.

Portfolio Management is shipped with a predefined set of content categories(CFFCONTENT and CFFURL; see transaction OACT) and associated contentrepositories (CFF and CFFURL; see transaction OAC0). Do not change these basicsettings. This pair of settings enables all files to be placed in the Portfolio ManagementWAS database.

The Project Management document area is called CFF. Make changes or settings relatedto this document area only.

Supported Scenarios for Content ServersThe following two scenarios are available in conjunction with content servers:

Scenario A: Files are stored in the database only (default configuration as shipped; runs"out of the box"); files are transported between the user's browser and the PortfolioManagement WAS. This does not involve any content servers.

Scenario B: Files are stored on a single content server; files are transported between theuser's browser and the Portfolio Management WAS, but stored on the CS. The contentserver is accessed through a different storage category. We recommend that you givethis category the name DPRMAIN or ZDPRMAIN, analogous to the cFolders Guide.

The advantage of scenario B in comparison to scenario A is that the WAS database is relieved ofthe file storage workload.

All the settings described below are relevant only if you use scenario B.

PrerequisitesIn order to use this function, you first have to install a content server. The installation of a contentserver on a particular server is described in the SAP Content Server Installation Guide (interfaceversion 0046; product versions 6.30 and 6.40 are both supported). You can find this guide onSAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/instguides under Installationand Upgrade Guides SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s) Installation 3-Installation-Standalone-Engines Installation-Content Server 6.40 on Unix or Installation-Content Server 6.40 on Windows.

ActivitiesCustomizing the Content Server in the Project Management WAS

Changing the Content Server Configuration

Page 118: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

118 October 2012

Customizing the Content Server in the ProjectManagement WASPrerequisitesThe hardware and basic content server software has been installed as described in the SAPContent Server Installation Guide (see Distributed Content Server).

ProcedureCreating a Content Server Entry

1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server Basis ServicesKnowledge Provider Content Management Service Define Content Repositories ,

choose Content Repository Display/Change .

2. Choose Content Repository Create .

3. Enter a name and a description for the content server.

4. Enter CFF in the Document Area field and HTTP in the Storage Type field.

All other settings are described in the standard SAP Content Server Installation Guide.

Creating a Storage Category for a Repository1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server Basis Services

Knowledge Provider Content Management Service Define Content Categories ,choose New entries.

2. Enter a name and description, and then enter CFF in the Document Area field.

3. Enter the name of the newly-created content repository in the Content Repository field.

Setting the new Content Server as the Default Storage Category1. Choose transaction DMWB.

2. Choose model area CFF in the tree.

3. Navigate to PHIO-classes, node CFF_VERSION_V.

4. Change the standard attribute STORAGE_CATEGORY from CFFCONTENT to thecategory you have defined above.

5. Repeat this for node CFF_ADD_FILES_V and for CFF_VERS in nodeCFF_VERSION_V.

Page 119: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 119

Changing the Content Server ConfigurationProcedureChanging Scenarios

1. In order to switch from scenario A to scenario B (see Distributed Content Server [Page117]), simply configure the content server as described under Customizing the ContentServer in the Project Management WAS [Page 118]. The old documents that have beenstored in the Web Application Server (WAS) database are still valid; however, they arenot automatically transferred to the content server.

2. Switching from scenario B to scenario A is only possible if the files are migrated from theCS to the database. The KPRO migration report RSIRPIRL allows files to be migratedbetween repositories for this purpose (regardless of whether it is a database repository ora CS repository).

Upgrading to a New Content ServerWhen an upgrade to a new content server is carried out, for example, because a certain contentserver is full, no data is lost. You can use the KPRO migration report RSIRPIRL, which allows youto transfer files from the current content server to the new one.

Page 120: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

120 October 2012

Current SettingsThis section contains information about settings required during production operation. Thisinvolves, for example:

Data replication

Business Customizing

As a rule, ABAP-based production systems are locked for Customizing. There are, however,certain cases in which Customizing settings must be made in production systems, for example, tochange currency exchange rates. You can implement these current settings in the menu inABAP-based systems. This section also contains information about current settings that must beimplemented in non-ABAP systems.

ProcessPerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 121: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 121

Generating SAP LoadEach time you call the individual WebDynpro pages that make up SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement for the first time, you may experience delays as the individual pages are generatedat runtime. To avoid this, we recommend that in the following cases, you generate each pageonce, centrally:

After you have installed SAP Portfolio and Project Management for the first time or afteran upgrade.

After importing Support Packages.

If you have added customer fields to SAP Portfolio and Project Management tables.

Procedure1. Use transaction SGEN to start the SAP Load Generator.

2. Select Generation of Webdynpros and then choose (Continue).

3. Select CPRXRPM for SAP Portfolio and Project Management and choose (Continue).

4. Confirm the default selection and choose (Continue).

5. Choose Start Job Directly to start the current generation directly, or Plan Job For to runthe generation later on.

For more information, see (Job Monitor).

Page 122: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

122 October 2012

Granting Administration Authorization for an ObjectThere is always at least one person assigned to an object in Portfolio Management withadministration authorization for this object. However, it is possible that the person withauthorization is not available due to illness, for example, and the administrative tasks need to betransferred to another person. In such cases, you can enter new administrators for a particularobject in Portfolio Management if you are a superuser.

By doing this you bypass the authorization concept for Portfolio Management. Therefore,only use this form of authorization concept in emergencies.

PrerequisitesTo be able to assign authorizations as a superuser, in your user master you must have a role or aprofile that assigns the authorizations to the authorization object ACO_SUPER for the activityADMIN.

ProcedureAs a superuser, in Portfolio Management on the Miscellaneous Authorizations tab page,you can give administration authorization to the user who will take over managing the portfolioobject.

For more information on granting authorizations, see the help for Portfolio Management underCommon Functions Authorizations .

Page 123: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 123

Page 124: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

124 October 2012

Project Management: ConfigurationBusiness ScenarioThis business scenario configuration guide is valid for the business scenario Project Managementwith the corresponding release of the associated SAP application components.

Business Scenario and SAP Application Components

BusinessScenario SAP Application Component with Minimum Release

ProjectManagement

SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0

SAP ERP

SAP BI

For more information (including the minimum release), see the MasterGuide for SAP Project and Portfolio Management on SAP ServiceMarketplace at http://service.sap.com/plm-inst under UsingPortfolio and Project Management.

ContentThis business scenario configuration guide tells you everything you need to do to successfullyimplement the business scenario. The guide explains the sequence of the individual configurationactivities and how these activities are interdependent.

You can find information about the following:

Making general settings

Connecting the systems

Data replication

Business Customizing

Setting up the component-specific master data

Regular settings in production operation

Unless specified otherwise, make the settings described in this section on SAP EHP2 for SAPNetWeaver 7.0, on which SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 is based.

This document describes the configuration of Project Management within SAP Portfolio andProject Management 5.0 and the configuration of SAP ERP. There is a separate configurationguide for cFolders. No special settings are required in SAP BI in the BI system.

Page 125: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 125

Target Group Technical consultants

Application consultants

Members of project teams involved in implementing an SAP solution

SAP customer IT department

The section on System Connections [External] is aimed at technical consultants, while thesections on Business Customizing [External] and Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data[External] are aimed at application consultants. All other sections are of interest to both consultantgroups. The relevancy of the sections for the other target groups depends on the tasks of theindividual groups.

Business Scenario Configuration Guide FeedbackWe would like to keep improving our business scenario configuration guide and are thereforeinterested in your feedback. If you find any errors in the configuration guide, create a messageunder the Project Management (PLM-PRO) component on SAP Service Marketplace athttp://service.sap.com/messages.

Page 126: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

126 October 2012

SAP Notes Before you start configuration, read the following SAP Notes:

SAP Note Number Title

1377080 PPM 5.0: Overview of notes

1377104 FAQs: SAP Portfolio and Project Managment 5.0

1377082 PPM 5.0: Support package information and notes

1399319 Portfolio Management: Customers UIs

1402804 Support Packages for CPRXRPM 500_702

1402912 PPM 5.0: Supported Browsers

1436778 SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0: Restrictions

1417134 PPM 5.0: List of all BAdIs

You can find all SAP Notes on the SAP Service Marketplace athttp://service.sap.com/notes.

Page 127: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 127

General SettingsPurposeThis section contains general information that you need to start the business scenarioconfiguration.

Familiarize yourself with the documentation landscape for SAP solutions andbusiness scenarios. For a description of the types of documentation provided bySAP and where to find the current versions, see Documentation Landscape forSAP Solutions and Business Scenarios [External].

Prerequisites The system landscape is installed, using the SAP solution master guides, and the SAP

component and business scenario installation and upgrade guides.

You are familiar with the relevant SAP notes about installation, configuration, and upgrade.

For more information, see SAP Notes.

ProcedurePerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 128: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

128 October 2012

Usage Types, Supported Browsers, Java Versions,and so onAs of SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0, the following usage types are supported:

Usage Type Client/Browser Rendering

Roles andNavigationArea

SAP Portfolio andProject ManagementApplication/ Coding

Enterprise PortalBrowser(IE /Firefox

HTML PCD role inEnterprise Portal ABAP back-end system

NetWeaverBusiness Clientfor HTML (NWBCfor HTML)

Browser(IE /Firefox)

HTMLPFCG role inABAP back-endsystem

ABAP back-end system

NetWeaverBusiness Clientfor Desktop(NWBC forDesktop)

NWBC forDesktop

HTMLPFCG role inABAP back-endsystem

ABAP back-end system

HTML PCD role inEnterprise Portal ABAP back-end system

ProcedureThere are two different ways of using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal to call SAP Portfolio and Project Management. For theintegration of SAP Portfolio and Project Management with Enterprise Portal, see Making Settingsfor Integration with Enterprise Portal [External] (Portf. Mgmt) and Making Settings for Integrationwith Enterprise Portal [Page 174]. The portal role (PCD role) content delivered with the businesspackage for SAP Portfolio and Project Management defines the navigation area (worksets) andmenu entries (in the portal navigation area on the left) that a user sees in Enterprise Portal.

Without Enterprise PortalIn case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, you call theapplication in the browser using the URL for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, seeDetermining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [External] and Determining the URL forCalling Project Management [Page 130]. You must assign the users to the PFCG roleSAP_BPR_PPM, which provides the navigation area and menus

(see Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]).

Page 129: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 129

For both cases (with or without Enterprise Portal)For more information, see:

Portfolio Management

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [External]

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22]

Project Management

Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) [Page 141]

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

URL Customizing [Page 135]

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

See also SAP Note 1402912 for detailed information about:

Supported browsers / clients

Recommended browser settings

Supported Java runtime versions (on client side)

Supported MS Project versions for import/export

See also the Release Notes for SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0.

Page 130: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

130 October 2012

Determining the URL for Calling Project ManagementPrerequisitesConfigure the HTTP server (protocol and port). For more information, see Setting Up the HTTPServer (Protocol and Port).

In case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, the users musthave been assigned the PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM, which provides the navigation menus. Formore information, see sections Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) [Page141] and Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31].

ProcedureThere are two different options for using SAP Portfolio and Project Management:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal. For integration of SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement with Enterprise Portal, see section Making Settings for Integration with EnterprisePortal [Page 174].

Without Enterprise PortalYou call the Project Management application in the browser using a URL that is structured asfollows:

<Protocol>://<Host>.<Domain>.<Extension>:<Port>/sap/bc/nwbc/

The following table shows you how the parameters should be filled:

URLParameter What You Should Know

Protocol Protocol: http or https

Host Name of the application server on which the application is to be executed.

Domain withthe extension

Different PCs under a joint name. The domain can consist of a single host ora network.

Port

Can be left out if the default port 80 (http) is used for http or the default port443 (https) is used for HTTPS. You define the settings for the ports in theinstance profile of the system using the parameter icm/server_port_0 oricm/server_port_1. You can also view them in the ICM Monitor:

1. In the SAP Menu, choose Tools Administration MonitorSystem Monitoring Internet Communication Manager .

2. Choose Goto Parameters Display .

Page 131: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 131

If you do not want to log on to the SAP NetWeaver system using the client that is set as thedefault in the system (see transaction RZ10), you must include the client you want to use as aURL parameter. The corresponding URL parameter is called sap-client. For the logon to theclient 100, for example, the URL is structured as follows:

<Protocol>://<Host>.<Domain>.<Extension>:<Port>/sap/bc/nwbc/?sap-client=100

If you are using a proxy server, enter the absolute URL into the Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Project Management Basic Settings Define Absolute URLfor Calling Project Management . For more information, see the documentation in this IMGactivity.

For the supported browsers and clients, see section Usage Types, Supported Browsers, JavaVersions, and so on [Page 15].

Relevant only for upgrade customers: URLs from cProjects 4.0/4.5 should still work, as theyshould be redirected to the new screens. It is nevertheless recommended to use the new URLsdirectly whenever possible.

For more information about system-specific URL parameters (for example, logon language), seethe documentation for SAP NetWeaver.

Page 132: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

132 October 2012

Activating ServicesTo call the Project Management application, the HTTP services listed below must be activated inthe HTTP service tree (transaction SICF). The complete path from the service to the root of thetree (default_host) must be active.

If you upgrade or implement a Support Package, the services may be deactivated. Therefore,check whether the services are still active after you upgrade or implement a Support Package.

ProcedureGeneral Basis ServicesYou can find the basis services that you must activate in SAP Note 517484 in the sections onUsing Web Dynpro ABAP (WDA) Applications.

Project Management-Specific ServicesTo activate a service, open the path (selected from the list below) and choose either Service orVirt from the main menu, and then Host Activate or Activate Service in the context menu.

/default_host/sap/bc/bsp/sap/cfx_rfc_ui

(needed only if cFolders is used)

/default_host/sap/cpro

(for WebDAV access)

/default_host/sap/cprojects_easy

/default_host/sap/cprojects_file

/default_host/sap/bc/nwbc*

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/bcv*

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/plmu*

(for integration to PLM Object Navigator)

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/abp_launchpad*

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/apb_lpd*

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/ap_inm_transfer

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects

(Only relevant for upgrade customers: URLs from cProjects 4.0/4.5 should still work asthey should be redirected to the new screens. It is recommended to use the new URLsdirectly whenever possible; see Determining the URL for Calling Project Management[Page 130].)

Page 133: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 133

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_auth_admin_fpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_doc

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_fpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_mpmon

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_settings_fpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_search_fpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_search_global

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_search_service

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_search_rpm

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_services

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_vacant_roles_fpm

/default_host/sap/public/PPM*

/default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap/cprojects_replace_user_bp_fpm

Determining the Absolute URL for Calling Project ManagementIf you are using a proxy server, enter the absolute URL into the Customizing for Portfolio andProject Management under Project Management Basic Settings Define Absolute URL forCalling Project Management .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

See also URL Customizing [Page 135].

Defining an AliasBy defining an alias in the HTTP service tree (transaction SICF), you can call the applicationusing a shorter, mnemonic URL in which you can, for example, specify the client for the logon.Note that in this case the Alias target element cannot contain the target node nwbc. At most it cancontain the path /default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/sap. You can then call the applicationvia /alias/cprojects.

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com.

Page 134: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

134 October 2012

SM59 Destinations and Portal System AliasesThere are two different options for using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalDefine the aliases listed below in the Enterprise Portal as system aliases for back-end systems.

Without Enterprise PortalDefine the aliases listed below as SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) in the SAP Portfolio andProject Management (back-end) system.

ProcedureThe following system aliases (in Enterprise Portal) and SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) inthe SAP Portfolio and Project Management (backend) system have to be defined:

SAP_cProjects and SAP_RPM:

Both should point to the SAP Portfolio and Project Management back-end system itself.

SAP_BS_FND (needed only in Enterprise Portal):

This should point to the SAP Portfolio and Project Management back-end system itself.

SAP_BW (optional):

This should point to the (optional) BI system. Needed for the Reports pages whichprovide links to BI Web reports.

For HTTPS, maintain the following SM59 destinations of type ‘H’ (HTTP) in the SAP Portfolio andProject Management (back-end) system in addition to the ones listed above (both should point tothe SAP Portfolio and Project Management backend system itself):

SAP_CPROJECTS_HTTPS

SAP_RPM_HTTPS

For these two SM59 destinations, maintain the Logon & Security tab under Security Options andset SSL to Active.

Page 135: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 135

URL CustomizingProcedureDefine a portal URL if you use SAP NetWeaver Portal, or a NWBC desktop URL if you useNetWeaver Business Client for Desktop, by going to Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Project Management Basic Settings Define Absolute URL for CallingProject Management .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 136: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

136 October 2012

Configuring the Call Up of the Online Help (SAPLibrary)SAP Portfolio and Project Management supports the following online help (SAP Library) variants:

PlainHtmlHttp

The help files are installed on a Web server.

PlainHtmlFile

The help files are installed in a directory on a file server, which facilitates general access.

DynamicHelp

The files are accessed via the Knowledge Warehouse Server.

For more information about connecting the online help, see the readme.txt in the documentationpackage for SAP Portfolio and Project Management that you have downloaded from SAP ServiceMarketplace at http://service.sap.com/swdc.

PrerequisitesYou have ensured that no entries have been selected in the HLPRESOL table. You haveselected the entry OTHER_RELEASE in the IWBSETTING table, or you have created the entry ifit did not yet exist. For more information, see SAP Note 684431.

ProcedureInstallation of the Online Help for the Variants PlainHtmlHttp andPlainHtmlFile

1. First, create a directory in the file system of your Web server or file server (for example,<Drive>:/SAPHelp/PlainHTML/helpdata). This directory will be the root directory of thehelp installation.

2. In this root directory, create an additional directory for every language version that youwant to install and name these directories with the relevant language abbreviation, forexample, DE for German and EN for English documentation.

If you have already installed the online help for the Web Application Server (WAS) 7.00as a PlainHtmlHttp or PlainHtmlFile variant, you do not have to create any new directorieson the Web server or the file server. You can then use the existing directory structure ofthis installation. You can ignore any warning messages (that say you could be overwritingexisting files) that arise when you are copying help files to the directory structure later on.

You can find the files you require in the document package you download for SAPPortfolio and Project Management in the corresponding language directory in theplainhtml directory.

3. Copy the files to the corresponding language directory in the root directory of the helpinstallation.

Page 137: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 137

4. Create a virtual directory on your Web server or file server, or release a directory and linkthis directory to the root directory of the help installation in the file system. For moreinformation, see the help for your Web server or file server.

The root directory of the help installation can now be viewed under the name that youassigned to the virtual directory or the released directory (for example, saphelp).

Installation of the Online Help for the DynamicHelp VariantThe files to help you install the online help on a Knowledge Warehouse Server are located in thedocument package you download for SAP Portfolio and Project Management in thecorresponding language directory in the htmlhelp directory. For more information aboutinstallation, see the Import of SAP KW Contents section in the following documents on SAPService Marketplace:

For Release 6.0 at service.sap.com/instguides under SAP ComponentsGuides for SAP Knowledge Warehouse Release 6.0 SAP Knowledge Warehouse

6.0 Installation Guide .

For Release 7.0 at service.sap.com/instguides under SAP NetWeaver SAPNetWeaver 2004 Installation SAP KW Configuration Guide SAP KnowledgeWarehouse 7.0 .

Configuration in SAP Netweaver 7.0Enter the following information in Customizing under General Settings Setting Variants forHelp (SAP Library) on the tab page of the documentation variant you want to install:

Column Entry

Variant You can choose a description but it must be a unique description, for example,PPM_Docu_DE (for the German help) or PPM_Docu_EN (for the English help).

Platform NONE

Area IWBHELP (Documentation)

Server

For PlainHtmlHttp: Name of the Web server, and if necessary, includethe domain and port of the server (this is only necessary if the port is notthe default Http port 80).

For PlainHtmlFile: Not relevant

For DynamicHelp: This is copied from the configuration of theKnowledge Warehouse Server.

Path

For PlainHtmlHttp: Name of the virtual directory that is linked to the rootdirectory of the help installation on the Web server (for example,saphelp).

For PlainHtmlFile: Name of the released directory on the file serverincluding the server name under which the root directory of thedocumentation installation on the Web server is visible (for example,<server>/saphelp).

Page 138: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

138 October 2012

Column Entry

For DynamicHelp: Not relevant

Language Help language

Default Determines whether or not the language is the default language.

See also:For more information, see the Installation Guide for SAP Library on SAP Service Marketplace atservice.sap.com/instguides under SAP Library.

Page 139: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 139

Setting Up Business PartnersIn Project Management, employees are represented as business partners in the role ofEmployee.

If you want to use Resource Management in Project Management, you have to create businesspartners in the Project Management system. Before doing so, you have to make the requiredsettings for SAP business partners.

ProcedureMake the settings in Customizing for Project Management under Cross-ApplicationComponents SAP Business Partner .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 140: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

140 October 2012

Replacement of User or ResourceWith the Replace User / Resource service, you can replace an individual user or an individualresource by another user or by another resource. You can perform the replacement in multipleobjects, relevant subobjects, and in role-task assignments. To use this function, navigate in thefront-end system by choosing Portfolio and Project Administration Services Replace User /Resource .

For more information, see Replacing User or Resource in SAP Library for SAP Portfolio andProject Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com.

With Enterprise PortalIf you use SAP Portfolio and Project Management in the Enterprise Portal, the Replace User /Resource entry is invisible by default. To make it visible, do the following:

1. Edit the attributes of portal page cpr_replace_showcase.

2. Set the Invisible attribute to No.

Without Enterprise PortalThe Replace User / Resource entry is invisible by default. To make it visible do the following:

1. Choose transaction PFCG and edit role SAP_BPR_PPM.

2. Choose the Menu tab and then choose Role menu Portfolio and ProjectAdministration Overview Services Replace User / Resource . DoubleclickReplace User / Resource.

3. Choose Other Node Details and deselect the Invisible checkbox.

For more information, see Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) on HelpPortal at http://help.sap.com.

Page 141: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 141

Activating Single Roles for Project Management(PFCG)One or more composite roles must be assigned to each user in Project Management, so that theuser receives the corresponding authorizations to work in Project Management. The followingcomposite roles are available as standard:

SAP_CPR_DECISION_MAKER

SAP_CPR_INTERESTED

SAP_CPR_MEMBER

SAP_CPR_PROJECT_LEAD

SAP_CPR_TEMPLATE_RESPONSIBLE

SAP_CPR_RESOURCE_MANAGER

SAP_CPR_BVC_USER_COMP

The composite roles contain several single roles. SAP supplies the following single roles forProject Management as standard:

SAP_CPR_PROJECT_ADMINISTRATOR

SAP_CPR_TEMPLATE_ADMINISTRATOR

SAP_CPR_USER

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER

SAP_BPR_PPM

The single roles contain authorizations that a user needs to work with Project Management. Youdo not usually assign these roles directly to the users, but indirectly through composite roles.

The composite roles consist of a combination of single roles and their authorizations (see roledescriptions in transaction PFCG). They do not have their own authorizations.

The composite role SAP_CPR_PROJECT_LEAD contains the single roleSAP_CPR_USER, which must be included in every composite role, and the single roleSAP_CPR_PROJECT_ADMINISTRATOR, which allows projects to be created.

If Enterprise Portal is not used, then the role SAP_BPR_PPM provides the navigationmenu definition for SAP NetWeaver Business Client. SAP_BPR_PPM must therefore beassigned to every user when SAP NetWeaver Business Client for HTML or SAPNetWeaver Business Client for Desktop is used (without using Enterprise Portal). Seealso Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio and Project Management [Page 130] andDefining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]. The composite role assigned to a userdetermines the initial views (that is, the navigation area) the user sees in Portfolio and

Page 142: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

142 October 2012

Project Management when Enterprise Portal is not used (see Defining Initial Views forRoles).

For details about the roles SAP_CPR_BCV_USER_COMP and SAP_CPR_BCV_USER,see Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV) for Resource Management[Page 161].

The authorization profiles for the single roles are not generated during the shipment. The singleroles are not activated for use in Project Management until they have been generated. Use thefollowing procedure to perform the generation.

If you do not activate the roles, an error occurs when you install Project Management.

Procedure1. Call transaction SUPC.

2. Select Roles with Non-Up-to-Date Profiles.

3. Enter SAP_CPR* in the Role field.

4. Select Generate Automatically.

5. Choose (Execute).

ResultAn authorization profile is generated for each single role. You can now use the transaction SU01to assign composite roles to the users or transaction PFCG to enter users for the roles (seeCreate New Composite Role in Creating Roles for Project-Specific Authorization Checks).

You may have to perform a user master comparison in transaction PFCG (see Create NewComposite Role in Creating Roles for Project-Specific Authorization Checks).

You must transport the single and composite roles to all the clients for which you want to useProject Management. You also have to perform a user master comparison after the transport.Also take note of the dialog box that appears when you start the transport.

Depending on requirements, you can define new roles in the following procedure, Creating Rolesfor Project-Specific Authorization Checks).

Page 143: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 143

Creating Roles for Project-Specific AuthorizationChecksYou can also use the roles from the SAP authorization check within Project Management for theauthorization check (see the General Authorizations and Project-Specific Authorizations sectionsin the documentation on Project Management under Authorizations). This gives you the option ofgranting read authorization to all Project Management users in a project by entering the SAP roleSAP_CPR_USER as the role on the Authorizations tab page in Project Management.

The SAP role SAP_CPR_USER serves as a general authorization to allow a user to use ProjectManagement. This authorization does not, however, authorize the user to perform any activities ina particular project. To do this, users need project-specific authorizations. You can distribute theproject-specific authorizations to the users either directly or through their assignment to a role.

Numerous roles are delivered with the SAP system. However, the system search functiondisplays only those roles for which a user is authorized, included roles assigned only for specificprojects.

If the single role SAP_CPR_USER is assigned to users either directly or via a composite role intheir user masters, these users have the authorization to display the roles SAP_CPR_USER andSAP_CPR_PROJECT_ADMINISTRATOR (authorization object S_USER_AGR: Authorizations:Check for Roles). This allows users to use both of these roles in Project Management to assign aproject-specific authorization.

In addition to the standard roles, you can also use this procedure to create your own single andcomposite roles. If you want to use these roles in project-specific authorization checks, you mustfirst make the new roles accessible to Project Management users. You do this by storing theDisplay authorization for your own roles in the authorization object S_USER_AGR in the roleSAP_CPR_USER (see Making New Roles Available in Project Management below).

ProcedureCreating a New Single Role

1. In the SAP Menu of the Project Management system, open role maintenance by choosingTools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles , or by

using the transaction PFCG.

2. Under Roles, enter a name and choose Create Role.

Ensure that the name that you specify is within the customer namespace.

3. Enter a Name and save the new role.

4. Select the User tab page.

5. Enter the users that you want to assign to the role.

6. Save your changes.

7. On the User tab page, check if User comparison is flagged with a red traffic light. If it is,choose User comparison.

Page 144: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

144 October 2012

Through the user adjustment of the composite role, all the roles that belong to thecomposite role are adjusted. After this comparison, the user data in the user masterrecord is updated.

8. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

Creating a New Composite Role1. In the SAP Menu of the Project Management system, open role maintenance by choosing

Tools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles .

2. Under Roles, enter a name and choose Create Comp. Role.

Ensure that the name that you specify is within the customer namespace.

3. Enter a Name and save the new role.

4. Select the Roles tab page.

5. Assign existing single roles to the composite role.

6. Select the User tab page.

7. Enter the users that you want to assign to the role.

8. Save your changes.

9. On the User tab page, check whether or not User comparison is flagged with a red trafficlight. If it is, choose User comparison.

Through the user adjustment of the composite role, all the roles that belong to thecomposite role are adjusted. After this comparison, the user data in the user masterrecord is updated.

10. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

Making New Roles Available in Project Management1. In the SAP Menu of the Project Management system, open role maintenance by choosing

Tools Administration User Maintenance Role Administration Roles , or byusing the transaction PFCG.

2. Under Role, enter the standard single role SAP_CPR_USER and choose (ChangeRole).

3. Open the Authorizations tab page and choose (Change Authorization Data).

4. Expand the entry Basis: Administration and then Authorizations: Role Check and choose(Change) beside Role Name.

A popup appears which contains all of the previously-entered roles for the authorizationobject.

5. Enter the new single and composite roles that you have created and want to use inProject Management in this table.

Page 145: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 145

6. Save your entries.

7. Choose (Generate) to create the authorization profile.

The authorization profile groups together several single authorizations or additionalauthorization profiles and then is entered in the user master record. This means that all ofthe authorizations contained in this profile will be assigned to the user.

8. On the User tab page, check if User comparison is flagged with a red traffic light. If it is,choose User comparison.

After the user comparison has been executed, the generated profile will be entered in theuser master record.

9. In the dialog box, choose (Complete Comparison).

ResultYou have created new single or composite roles and activated them. The roles are now availablein Project Management. A user can display these roles in Project Management and assignauthorizations to them. All users that are assigned to these roles have the authorizations thatwere assigned to the roles in Project Management.

As an additional setting, per Entering Default Values for User-Specific Settings, you candetermine which initial views a user with a particular role should see in Project Management (seeDefining the Navigation Area for Roles).

Page 146: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

146 October 2012

Entering Default Values for User-Specific SettingsThe users in Project Management can personalize certain settings. You can enter default valuesfor these settings.

The settings you make here apply when Project Management is called for the first time. Onceusers change their personal settings, their changes apply each time the application is calledafterwards.

Procedure1. In the SAP Menu of the Project Management system, open role maintenance by choosing

SAP Easy Access Tools Administration User Maintenance Role AdministrationRoles .

2. Under Role, enter the name of the role and choose (Change Role).

3. Select the Personalization tab page.

4. Double-click the entry Project Management: Storage for User-Specific Settings(Personalization object key DPR_USER_SETTINGS).

5. Enter the default values that every user assigned to this role should see.

6. Save your entries.

Alternatively, you can use the DPR_CHANGE_USER_SETTINGS program to update the Project-Management-specific user settings for one user or for all users. The changeable user settings arethe same as described above. For more information about theDPR_CHANGE_USER_SETTINGS program, see the program documentation.

Page 147: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 147

Defining the Navigation Area for RolesThere are two different ways of using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0:

With Enterprise Portal

Without Enterprise Portal

With Enterprise PortalYou use the URL of the Enterprise Portal to call SAP Portfolio and Project Management. For theintegration of SAP Portfolio and Project Management with Enterprise Portal, see Making Settingsfor Integration with Enterprise Portal [External] (Portf. Mgmt) and Making Settings for Integrationwith Enterprise Portal [Page 174]. The portal role (PCD role) content delivered with the businesspackage for SAP Portfolio and Project Management defines the navigation area (worksets) andmenu entries (in the portal navigation area on the left) that a user sees in Enterprise Portal.

Without Enterprise PortalIn case SAP Portfolio and Project Management is used without Enterprise Portal, you call theapplication in the browser using the URL for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, seeDetermining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [External] and Determining the URL forCalling Project Management [Page 130]. You must assign the users to the PFCG roleSAP_BPR_PPM, which provides the navigation area and menus

(see Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]).

ProcedureWith Enterprise PortalTo change and adapt the worksets, pages, iViews, and so on, assigned to a portal role (PCDrole), the portal content delivered with the business package for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0 should be copied and adapted accordingly. For more information, see the SAPEnterprise Portal Content Administration Guide and the documentation for the Business Packagefor SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0. Make sure the navigation area defined for accessusing Enterprise Portal and the PFCG role defined authorizations of the users for the back-endare aligned and fit together.

Without Enterprise PortalThe PFCG role SAP_BPR_PPM provides the navigation area delivered in the standard. Tochange and adapt the navigation area, this PFCG role should be copied and adapted accordingly.In order to change the navigation area defined by a PFCG role, go to transaction PFCG (RoleMaintenance), edit the PFCG role which should be changed, switch to tab Menu, and adapt themenu structure according to your needs. For more information see the SAP NetWeaver BusinessClient documentation (including Guides), and the documentation for transaction PFCG.

For Both Cases (With or Without Enterprise Portal)The Reports page available in the standard navigation area provides links to BI Web reports. Thisis dependent to the optional usage of BI. If you want to use the Reports pages, it is required thatthe SM59 destination SAP_BW (back-end) or the system alias SAP_BW (portal) has beendefined (see SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22] for more information).

Page 148: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

148 October 2012

For more information, see:

Portfolio Management

Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

Activating Single Roles for Portfolio Management (PFCG) [External]

Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio Management [External]

Project Management

Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) [Page 141]

Determining the URL for Calling Project Management [Page 130]

URL Customizing [Page 135]

Making Settings for the Control Plan [Page 220]

The entry Control Plans under Project Management is invisible by default.

Page 149: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 149

Activating Change DocumentsIn Project Management, a change document function is available for the following objects:

Checklist templates

Project templates

Projects

Control plans

Control plan templates

In the standard delivery, the function is deactivated for these objects. If the function is active, thesystem also records changes made to dependent objects; in projects, these include phases,checklists, approvals, and project roles.

Procedure1. You can activate the change recording function in Customizing for Project Management

by choosing Basic Settings Activate Change Documents .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

2. Select the Display Change Documents indicator on the General tab page. You do this asthe user in the personal user settings.

Page 150: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

150 October 2012

Document Management with Knowledge ProviderYou can use Knowledge Provider (KPro) for Document Management. To do so, you must createa status profile for documents.

ProcedureThe following document categories are available in Project Management:

0_SAP-DOC (SAP Standard Document)

If you want to use statuses for documents in Project Management, you must create thestandard status profile for documents in the IMG activity Create Status Profile.

Do not create any other status profiles, as the system does not take these into account(see also SAP Note 731417).

Do not change any data in the status profile you created.

0_SAP-FLD (SAP Standard Folder)

You do not have to make any additional settings for folders.

Page 151: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 151

Creating/Changing the Status Profile for ProjectElementsIf you want to define your own user status for Project Management in addition to the systemstatus delivered by SAP, you must create a status profile for the status. The status profile enablesyou to do the following:

Define the order in which the user status is set by using status numbers.

If you do not specify a status number, you can define the user status yourself.

Define an initial status.

Allow, forbid, or flag certain business transactions for a user status with a warningmessage.

Set or delete a user status using certain business transactions.

Procedure1. Create the status profile for the user status in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project

Management under Project Management Basic Settings Create/Change UserStatus for Status Profile .

2. In each case, assign one or more than one object type for which the status profile(s) isvalid.

3. Make any other required settings.

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 152: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

152 October 2012

Activating Workflow for Change DocumentsProject Management offers a workflow function that informs a project member automatically by e-mail if change documents were created for a project element for which the project member isresponsible. You can use the sample workflow WS28700006.

PrerequisitesAll relevant users, as well as the user WF_BATCH, have a valid e-mail address in the usermaster.

Procedure1. Make the required settings in the SAP menu under Tools Business Workflow

Development Definition Tools Events Event Creation Change Documents

1. Overview (transaction SCDO)

Enter DPR_PROJECTS in the table.

2. Define Workflow Properties (transaction SWED)

Enter the following data:

Description Technical Name

Change document object DPR_PROJECT

Leading table in change document DPR_PROJECT

Change document key with structure DPR_PROJECT

Action: Change X

Structure DPR_TS_BUSINESS_OBJECT_KEY

Function module BAPI_BUS2175_OBJECT_KEY_SET

3. Linkage (transaction SWEC)

Enter the following data:

Name Technical Name

Change document DPR_PROJECT

Object category BOR object type

Business object type BUS2175

Event CHANGED

On change X

You can define the field restrictions as you wish.

Page 153: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 153

2. In transaction SCOT (SAPConnect), make the relevant settings for sending e-mails:

1. Double-click on SMTP.

2. Choose Settings next to Internet.

3. Under Business Object/Reference, choose the entryHTM.

For more information, see Help Application Help .

Page 154: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

154 October 2012

Activating Workflow for Status AdministrationProject Management includes a workflow function that automatically informs processors by e-mailwhen they have project work to complete. There are two sample workflows available.

PrerequisitesAll relevant users, as well as the user WF_BATCH, have a valid e-mail address in the usermaster.

ProcedureIf you do not use workflow in your business at this point, execute the automatic Customizing forworkflow.

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0 athttp://help.sap.com under SAP NetWeaver SAP Application Server ABAP MiscellaneousServices of AS ABAP Reference Documentation SAP Business Workflow Workflow SystemAdministration Automatic Workflow Customizing .

1. In transaction BSVX, create the assignment between the system status and the events forthe status object types. The following table shows you the data you must enter:

Status ObjectType

Business ObjectType Event Status Restrictions

DX6 (checklistitem) BUS2174 Released I1701 (Released)

DX7 (task) BUS2175 Released I1701 (Released)

DX4 (phase) BUS2173Released

Phase has status'For Approval'

I1701 (Released)

I1706 (For approval)

DX3 (projectdefinition) BUS2172 Released I1701 (Released)

2. The sample workflows WS28700005 and WS28700001 are delivered for the businessobject types BUS2174 and BUS2175.

3. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver Application Server 7.0 athttp://help.sap.com under SAP NetWeaver SAPApplication Server ABAP SAPBusiness Workflow Reference Documentation Using Events Event Creation

Creation of Events Upon Status Changes .

4. In transaction SCOT (SAPConnect), make the relevant settings for sending e-mails:

1. Double-click on SMTP.

2. Choose Settings next to Internet.

3. Under Business Object/Reference , choose the entry HTM.

For more information, see Help Application Help .

Page 155: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 155

Making Settings for AlertsIn Project Management, alert messages are automatically sent in the following cases:

If all the tasks of a checklist item have been completed or if all the checklist items of achecklist have been finished.

In Multi-Project Management.

You can also configure the system such that alerts are sent for the following objects because aseverity threshold value has been violated:

Project elements

Object links

Assignments

Staffing

Business partners

Project participants

For project elements and object links, alerts can also be sent if the severity is set manually, or if athreshold value has been violated for a subobject.

The Alert Manager is used to send alerts. SAP supplies the following alert categories for ProjectManagement:

CPROJECTS_SEVERITY for alerts due to severity threshold violations.

You can copy and change this category if necessary.

CPROJECTS_MPM for alerts in Multi-Project Management.

CPROJECTS_ACTION for alerts for checklists and checklist items.

For more information about the alert manager, use transaction ALRTCATDEF and choose HelpApplication Help .

PrerequisitesYou have made the relevant settings for sending e-mails in transaction SCOT (SAPConnect):

If a user has been assigned to the business partner, the system uses that user's e-mailaddress.

If the user assigned to the business partner does not have an e-mail address, the systemcannot send any e-mails, even if an e-mail address has been entered for the businesspartner.

Page 156: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

156 October 2012

The e-mail address of the business partner is used only if the business partner has notbeen assigned a user.

For more information, choose Help Application Help from the SCOT transaction.

Procedure You do not have to make any further settings for alerts for checklists and checklist items

or for Multi-Project Management.

For alerts depending on severity, in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Project Management Evaluations Define Severity , you mustdefine the conditions under which an alert must be sent.

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 157: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 157

Making Settings for Searching with TREXProject Management provides a full-text search using the SAP search engine TREX. You use thissearch engine to find documents. To use the search function, you have to implement the settingsoutlined below.

If you do not use TREX, you can continue to use the regular search function.

PrerequisitesYou have installed the TREX search engine.

Procedure1. Make the following settings in Customizing in your Project Management system under

SAP NetWeaver Knowledge Management Settings in the Knowledge WarehouseSystem Document Management Service:

1. In the Define Indexing Readiness activity, activate indexing for the CFFdocument area (Release Index indicator). A classification is not necessary(Classify indicator).

2. In the Schedule Asynchronous Indexing and De-indexing activity, schedule theindexing or de-indexing as a background process.

2. You can use transaction SKPR07 to manage and monitor the indexed documents(document class CFF_VERS). You can also trigger the indexing process manually. TheSKPR07 transaction enables you to:

o Determine marked documents

o Determine problem cases in indexing

o Index specific documents at a later date

Index or de-index individual documents

Index specific languages

Index by class

Index by document area

o Determine relevant index categories

Page 158: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

158 October 2012

Making Settings for the Graphical ViewThe graphical view of Project Management is implemented by a Web Dynpro ABAP control whichuses an internal Java applet, for which you have to make the settings described below.

ProcedureInstall a Java runtime environment (JRE or Java plug-in) on the local PC. We recommend thatyou use the latest version of the Java plug-in. We also recommend that you install the latestversion of the applet, which can be found in SAP Note 1035436.

After updating the applet, make sure that the cache of the JRE is reset (see SAP Note 1014150).

The Java runtime environment has a fixed memory size which cannot be increased duringruntime. This can cause OutOfMemory exceptions when working with the graphical view. SAPNote 1014381 describes how to adjust the parameters of the JRE.

The applet does not always load when running in a portal environment; see SAP Note 945516 fora description of how the portal needs to be customized.

See SAP Note 1402912 for supported browsers, recommended browser settings and supportedJava runtime versions, and also Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and soon [Page 15].

Page 159: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 159

Making Global Enhancements to Project ElementsProcedureYou can enhance the application according to your needs to a certain degree. You have thefollowing options:

Display Customer-Specific Fields on the InterfaceIn Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Project Management

Global Enhancements to Project Elements , carry out the following steps:

1. Define your customer-specific fields under Enhance Database Tables.

2. To display the new fields on the interface, choose one of the following options:

o Display the new fields with Define Field Groups for Customer Fields on one ofyour own tab pages.

o Change the field properties if necessary under Set Up Field Control.

o Perform the Show Additional Tab Page in Project Management activity.

3. If you also want to use the search functions for the new fields, perform the EnhanceSearch Help activity.

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)You will find BAdIs for configuring various Project Management functions in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Project Management. Under Project Management

Global Enhancements to Project Elements , you have the following options:

To implement handling routines for project element events, use the Business Add-In(BAdI) Events in Project Management Application Objects (DPR_EVENTS).

To define default values and tests for your own fields and for the fields provided by SAP,implement BAdI: Check/Change Fields in Project Management (DPR_ATTRIBUTES).

To generate a project number in accordance with your user-defined rules during saving,use method GENERATE_PROJECT_ID in BAdI: Check/Change Fields in ProjectManagement (DPR_ATTRIBUTES).

To define additional fields of the operational project to be available in the projecttemplate, use method ADD_DATA4PROJ_TEMPL in BAdI: Check/Change Fields inProject Management (DPR_ATTRIBUTES).

If you are using BAPIs and want to use customer-specific fields there as well, you mustimplement the following BAdIs:

o BAdI: BOR Object Project Definition (BAPIEXT_BUS2172)

o BAdI: BOR Object Phase (BAPIEXT_BUS2173)

o BAdI: Approval for the BOR Object Phase (BAPIEXT_BUS2173_APP)

Page 160: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

160 October 2012

o BAdI: Individual Approval for BOR Object Phase(BAPIEXT_BUS2173_IAPP)

o BAdI: BOR Object Task (BAPIEXT_BUS2175)

o BAdI: BOR Object Checklist Header (BAPIEXT_BUS2176)

o BAdI: BOR Object Checklist Item (BAPIEXT_BUS2174)

o BAdI: BOR Object Checklist Reference (BAPIEXT_BUS2164)

o BAdI: BOR Object Project Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2170)

o BAdI: BOR Object Phase in a Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2167)

o BAdI: Approval for BOR Object Phase in a Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2167_APP)

o BAdI: Individual Approval for BOR Object Phase in a Template(BAPIEXT_BUS2167_IAPP)

o BAdI: BOR Object Task in a Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2169)

o BAdI: BOR Object Checklist Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2171)

o BAdI: BOR Object Checklist Item in a Template (BAPIEXT_BUS2168)

o BAdI: BOR Object Role (BAPIEXT_BUS2177)

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Activating Customer Connection EnhancementsIn the Customer Connection program, improvement requests raised by customers have beenimplemented and delivered through SAP notes and support packages. In the ProjectManagement area, this applies to the following enhancements, for example:

The deletion of project-specific authorizations along wih the role or resource assignmentthey are related to

The milestone trend analysis

The display of additional phase or task data on the Gantt chart

By default, all Customer Connection improvemets are switched off in the system. To be able touse them, you need to implement a corresponding BAdI method, or activate a global switch inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management.

For a full list of Customer Connection enhancements to SAP Portfolio and Project Management,see to SAP Note 1631964. For more information about the individual enhancements and the wayyou can activate them, see the related SAP notes as well as the corresponding release notes forSAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0.

Page 161: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 161

Making Settings for Business Context Viewer (BCV)for Resource ManagementPrerequisitesTo activate the BCV side panel for resource management in Project Management, you mustensure that the user is assigned the following PFCG roles in Staffing Overview and ResourceOverview :

SAP_BCV_USER

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER

These two roles are included in the composite role SAP_CPR_BCV_USER_COMP

Make sure that the following InfoSet Queries for user group DPR_USER_G are generated:

DPR_QUE_BUAV

DPR_QUE_BUST

DPR_QUE_RODE

DPR_QUE_ROST

DPR_QUE_COPR

DPR_QUE_COPA

DPR_QUE_COBU

You do this using transaction sq01.

You have activated the FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application (/BCV/MAIN) businessfunction in transaction SFW5.

ProcedureIn the standard setup, a user can open the side panel for the selected role or business partner inStaffing Overview or Resource Overview. The system diplays two overviews showing the currentstaffing situation and the remaining demand or availability.

If the Enhanced Capital and Resource Mgmt Switch is activated in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings

Check Global Settings , the system also displays the side panel in the structure tree (for theproject header and the tasks). Here you can display overviews that show the confirmed and theplanned work effort. In addition, an equivalent overview is available in the Staffing Overview.

To implement your own BCV content for these views, use the BAdI DPR_BCV_RES. If you alsowant to change the meanings and the context key, you must change or enhance the attributes ofthe Web Dynpro context node BCV_DATA for the component controller of the Web Dynprocomponent DPR_RES_OVERVIEW. This node is mapped to the following views:

Page 162: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

162 October 2012

VI_RES_DATES,

VI_RES_DIST

VI_STAFF_DATES

VI_STAFF_DIST

VI_TT

The context mapping should be updated in case of changes in node BCV_DATA. There is alsoan example implementation for this BAdI.

Page 163: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 163

Making Settings to Display Resource Management-Related ViewsFor resource management (main view: Resources), the following sub-views are available:

Staffing Overview

Resource Overview

Details

Role Overview

Role Staffing

In the standard setup, only the views Staffing Overview, Resource Overview, and Details arevisible.

ProcedureTo modify the visible views, use the method SET_VISIBLE_RESOURCE_VIEWS in the BAdIDPR_RES_OVERVIEW.

For more information, see the example in the documentation for the activity.

Page 164: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

164 October 2012

Making Settings for Message MappingProcedureTo use Floorplan Manager message mapping in Project Management, you have to make thefollowing Customizing settings:

1. Call transaction sm30.

2. Enter the view name FPM_VMSGCATEGORY and choose Display or Maintain.

3. Ensure that the values in the table are defined as follows:

Namespace Message Category Message Category Name

SAP SAP_PPM SAP Portfolio and Project Management

4. Go back, enter the view name FPM_V_MSG_MAPPER and choose Display or Maintain.

5. Ensure that the values in the table are defined as follows:

Namespace Appl. Context Name Message Category Name

SAP SAP_PPM SAP_PPM

6. Modify the entries as required. You can, for example, change the message type, hide orreplace messages.

More InformationFor more information, about the Floorplan Manager, see SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability ApplicationPlatform by Key Capability ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI Technology

Floorplan Manager for Web Dynpro ABAP .

For more information, about the Message Mapper application, see SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application

Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology UI Technology Web UI TechnologyFloorplan Manager for Web Dynpro ABAP Message Mapper .

Page 165: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 165

Definition of Security Lists for OfficeControlsPortfolio and Project Management uses OfficeControls for the Microsoft Project integration andfor the HTTP-based check-in and check-out of documents. Since rendered pages are normallydisplayed in a Web browser connected to the Internet in Web Dynpro, security aspects must beconsidered for UI elements like OfficeControls.

Therefore the following security measures have been implemented for OfficeControl:

OfficeControl communicates only with authorized servers

Data can be stored only in authorized directories

Data can be read only from authorized directories

Only authorized file types can be opened directly with the default application

The authorized servers and directories and the authorized file types are listed in a whitelist forsecurity reasons; an administrator stores this information locally using transactionsWDR_ACF_WLIST and ACF_WHITELIST_SETUP. If requests for access to directories orcommunication with servers are sent using HTTP or HTTPS, the control first checks whether thisis allowed at all. It then compares the directories or servers in question with the data in the localwhite list file. It executes the relevant methods only if the authorization is set in the whitelist.

Whitelist certificates can be generated using transaction WDR_ACF_GEN_CERT and need to beinstalled on all end user PCs. To install the whitelist certificate, go to transactionACF_WHITELIST_SETUP and choose Install Certificate.

For more information, see Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server WebDynpro ABAP Set Up Whitelist for Active Controls and Activate Whitelist for Active Controls,as well as SAP notes 1544293 and 1502999.

For more information about the required Java version for the OfficeControl, see SAP Note1402912.

More InformationActivating HTTP-Based Document Management [Page 166]

Making Settings for Microsoft Project Integration [Page 186]

Page 166: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

166 October 2012

Activating HTTP-Based Document ManagementSAP Portfolio and Project Management supports HTTP-based check-in and check-out ofdocuments.

PrerequisitesYou have entered a valid user for the SICF service sap/bc/contentserver and the service isactivated. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at

http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by KeyCapability Knowledge Provider (BC-SRV-KPR) Content Management Service (BC-SRV-KPR)

Concepts HTTP Access for Repositories on SAP Web Application Server .

Procedure1. Activate HTTP-based document management. For more information, see Customizing for

Portfolio Management under Global Customizing Global Settings Override DefaultGlobal Settings .

2. Choose New Entries and enter the following data:

o Area: 0007 General Default Values

o Name: 0027 Check-in/Check-out of Documents (' ': Normal, 'X': HTTP-Based)

o Settings Value: ‘X’ to activate HTTP-based check-in/check-out of documents and‘ ‘ to deactivate the HTTP-Based check-in and check-out of documents.

3. Save your changes.

To use the HTTP-based check-in and check-out of documents every user needs to install a Javaruntime on his client PC. For the required Java version see SAP Note 1402912.

More InformationDefinition of Security Lists for OfficeControls [Page 165]

Page 167: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 167

Making Settings for SAP BusinessObjects ExplorerYou can find the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer pushbutton on any object dashboard, exceptitem template dashboard, initiative template dashboard, resource dashboard, and staffingdashboard.

PrerequisitesYou must have switched on the switch 0002 Master Switch 0008 Enhanced Capital andResource Mgmt Switch (see SAP Note 1457426) in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Portfolio Management Global Customizing Global Settings OverrideDefault Global Settings .

Procedure1. To create a user in SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, use the sign up link

https://bi.ondemand.com/user_registrations/new.

2. You configure the HTTP destination of the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer in the back-end system as follows:

1. Create a RFC connection by using transaction SM59.

2. Create new connection type G (HTTP Connection to External Server) with thefollowing technical settings, logon, and security:

Field Entry

Target Host bi.ondemand.com

Target Service 443

Path Prefix /

Logon Procedure No Logon

SSL Active

SSL Client CertificateDEFAULT SSL

No User or PW for logon

3. Create an HTTP client (valid within SAP Network) by using transactionSICF andby then choosing Execute (F8).

4. In the menue, choose Client Proxy Settings

5. Under Global Settings enter the following values:

Page 168: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

168 October 2012

Field Entry

Proxy Setting is Active X

No Proxy for local server X

No Proxy for following adresses *.<company>.<com>

6. Under HTTP Log, enter the following values:

Field Entry

Host Name proxy

Port 8080

User Name Username

PW DomainLogon or empty

7. Under HTTPs Log, enter the following values:

Field Entry

Host Name proxy

Port 8080

User Name Username

PW DomainLogon or empty

8. Add the SSL Client Certificate by choosing transaction STRUST

9. Enter in the Expand Node field SSL client SSL Client (Standard).

10. Select entry in expanded node.

11. Upload certificate for Equifax Secure Certificate Authority fromhttps://bi.ondemand.com.

12. Add to Certificate List.

13. Choose transaction SMICM

14. Under Administration ICM Restart , choose Yes.

15. Under Administration ICM Exit Hard , choose Global.

Page 169: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 169

3. You can check if an entry for Area 0007 and Name 0028 exists in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Portfolio Management Global Customizing

Global Settings Check Global Settings . If this entry does not exist, create this entryin Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under PortfolioManagement Global Customizing Global Settings Override Default Global Settings

. You must set the value for this entry to SAP_BI_ONDEMAND (name of the SAPBusinessObjects Explorer HTTP destination) and save your changes.

For more information about the Installation and Upgrade of SAP BusinessObjects Explorere, seehttps://service.sap.com/bosap-explorer Installation & Upgrade Guides SAP Business Objects

SAP Business Objects Intelligence (BI) Explorer XI 3.1 .

Page 170: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

170 October 2012

System ConnectionsPurposeThis section contains information about connecting the systems in an SAP system landscape.

This involves, for example:

Defining logical systems and assigning clients in the Online Transaction ProcessingSystem (OLTP)

Determining the systems, servers, clients, distribution models, and so on, in the system inwhich the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration settings and performing other activities required for theinteractions in an SAP system landscape

ProcedurePerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 171: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 171

Preparing Integration with cFoldersIf you have installed cFolders, you can exchange the documents for a project with internal orexternal partners in Project Management. To do this, you must define the target systems in whichyou want to create collaborations.

There are two scenarios:

Scenario 1: cFolders and Project Management run on the same system in the sameclient.

Scenario 2: cFolders and Project Management run on the same system in different clientsor on different systems.

PrerequisitesYou require cFolders administration authorization (SAP_CFX_ADMINISTRATOR role) to makesettings in the cFolders system.

If there is a firewall between the cFolders system and the Project Management system, you mustuse an SAP router. For more information, see SAP Note 30289.

ProcedureScenario 1

1. In cFolders under Network Administration Network , enter the absolute URL for thecFolders application. If you use a proxy server, enter the proxy name and the port.

You use the URL to call cFolders from Project Management. If you do not know the URL,contact your system administrator.

2. Ensure that the user a Project Management user uses to log on to cFolders, hasauthorization to create collaborations:

1. Choose User Management in cFolders.

2. Select the user by choosing Change.

3. Add the role SAP_CFX_COL_CREATOR to the Roles tab page to createcollaborations.

3. In the Project Management and cFolders back-end system, use the default internal RFCdestination NONE.

4. Enter the RFC destination NONE in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement under Project Management Connection to External Settings cFoldersIntegration Stipulate RFC Destination for Collaboration .

5. When a collaboration is created, the cFolders system is informed from which logicalProject Management system the collaboration data originates. For this, you must defineyour own logical system. You do this in Customizing in your Project Management systemunder SAP NetWeaver Base IDOC Interface / Application Link Enabling (ALE)

Basic Settings Logical Systems Define Logical System and Assign LogicalSystem to a Client.

Page 172: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

172 October 2012

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Scenario 21. In cFolders under Network Administration Network , enter the absolute URL for the

cFolders application. If you use a proxy server, enter the proxy name and the port.

You use the URL to call cFolders from Project Management. If you do not know the URL,contact your system administrator.

2. Ensure that the user a Project Management user uses to log on to cFolders, hasauthorization to create collaborations:

1. Choose User Management in cFolders.

2. Select the user by choosing Change.

3. Add the role SAP_CFX_COL_CREATOR to the Roles tab page to createcollaborations.

3. In the Project Management and cFolders back-end system, create an RFC destinationwith the connection type 3 for the cFolders or Project Management system from the SAPMenu under Tools Administration Administration Network RFC Destinations

.

Under Logon/Security, enter the client, not a user.

4. Select Current User.

You may require more than one RFC destination for cFolders systems. In this way, youcan link a project element in Project Management to multiple collaborations in variouscFolders systems. When you create a collaboration in Project Management you canselect the system you require from a dropdown box.

5. Enter the RFC destination(s) you just created in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Project Management Connection to External Settings

cFolders Integration Stipulate RFC Destination for Collaboration .

6. When a collaboration is created, the cFolders system is informed from which logicalProject Management system the collaboration data originates. For this, you must defineyour own logical system. You do this in Customizing in your Project Management systemunder SAP NetWeaver Base IDOC Interface / Application Link Enabling (ALE)

Basic Settings Logical Systems Define Logical System and Assign Logical Systemto a Client .

We recommend that you assign the same name to the logical system as the RFCconnection.

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 173: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 173

For Both Scenarios1. Make sure that the Project Management users also exist in the cFolders system or client.

2. Create a new role in the cFolders system with the required authorizations and assign allusers who work in cFolders and Project Management to the role.

1. In the SAP Menu, choose Tools Administration User Maintenance RoleAdministration Roles .

2. Create an authorization for the object S_RFCACL as described in SAP Note128447.

3. The logon to the cFolders system must take place without a logon screen. To ensure this,choose one of the two options described in Ensuring Logon Without the Logon Screen[Page 192].

Page 174: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

174 October 2012

Making Settings for Integration with EnterprisePortalThis procedure enables you to use Project Management in the Enterprise Portal by means of theBusiness Package for Projects, Portfolio Management, and Design Collaboration (PPMDC). Formore information, see SAP Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAPBusiness Suite SAP Project and Portfolio Management Business Package for Portfolio andProject Management 5.0 . Each user has access to various initial views (roles, worksets, andiViews), depending on his or her authorizations and the portal roles assigned.

PrerequisitesYou installed Enterprise Portal and imported the Business Package for Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0. Make sure you have defined the portal systems aliases as described in theBusiness Package documentation. See also SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page22].

ProcedureThe back-end configuration of Project Management is not automatically reflected in the Portalbecause the content of the portal roles is static and is not adjusted to match. You create theappropriate portal roles and assign them to the PFCG roles in the back-end so that theauthorizations defined in the back-end match the portal roles. To do this, you can use thepredefined portal content delivered with the Business Package for Portfolio and ProjectManagement 5.0 as examples or templates.

There are differences between using Project Management in the Portal and using it as a stand-alone version:

When you use Project Management in the portal, and if you want to use the resourceplanning application (RPA), you can use the Resource Planner portal role from SAP CRMinstead. For more information, see SAP Note 939501.

When you use Project Management outside the Portal, the header area of the applicationis visible if the Display Header indicator is selected in the user settings. When you useProject Management in the Portal, the header area of the application is not visible andthe Display Header indicator is grayed out in the user settings because the system usesthe header area of the Portal by default.

The Exit link is not available when you use Project Management in the Portal becauseyou log on to and log off from the Portal.

The integration with collaboration rooms is fully available only in the Portal.

The collaboration room lies in the Enterprise Portal. The integration with collaboration rooms isavailable as follows:

You are using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 in the Enterprise Portal.

You are using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 as a stand-alone version andyou have a connection to an external Enterprise Portal.

Page 175: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 175

For more information about using SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0 in the Portal, seeSAP Note 1377104.

If you want to navigate away and have forgotten to save your changes, you can use WorkProtectMode in the Portal to avoid data loss. For example, you can set WorkProtect Mode up in such away that the system asks the user whether the unsaved data should be saved before navigation.For more information about WorkProtect Mode, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver under

Getting Started – Using SAP Software First Steps Portal Personalizing the PortalSetting Portal Preferences .

When you use Project Management 5.0 in the Enterprise Portal, the same protocol must be usedto access the portal as is used for accessing the portal in the Project Management back-endsystem, that is, either HTTP for both of or HTTPS for both. If they are not the same, you may notbe able to call the Gantt chart and pop-ups. See also SAP Note 945516.

In cProjects 4.5, you were able to call the whole cProjects application in one single iView. Thereis no such iView in the Business Package for Portfolio and Project Management 5.0, as all thefunctionality of the Project Management application is available using the delivered content of theBusiness Package for Portfolio and Project Management 5.0..

As of SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0, the Business Package for Project Self-Service(PSS) is not supported. Alternatively, equivalent functionality, such as convenient taskconfirmation, is available in SAP Portfolio and Project Management 5.0. For more information,see SAP Notes 1167840, 1226233, and 1156006.

See also:

Usage Types and Supported Browsers, Java Versions, and so on [Page 15]

SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22]

Defining the Navigation Area for Roles [Page 31]

Activating Single Roles for Project Management (PFCG) [Page 141]

Determining the URL for Calling Portfolio and Project Management [Page 130]

URL Customizing [Page 135]

Page 176: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

176 October 2012

Preparing the Integration with Collaboration RoomsIf you want to use integration with collaboration rooms, you have to make a number of differentsettings that do not only apply to Project Management as well as other applications, such as theportal, virtual rooms, Web services and if necessary, WebDAV.

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on Help Portal at http://help.sap.com.

You access the collaboration rooms via the Collaborations tab page in Project Management.Using the Project Management standard template (cProjects_Standard_Template) when youcreate a room gives you access to the Project Management documents from the KM WebDAVpage in the room.

PrerequisitesYou have authorization for the following objects:

Display/Create Logical Port (transaction LPCONFIG): authorization object S_SRT_LPR

Maintain Services (transaction SICF): authorization object S_ICF_ADM

ProcedureCreating Logical Ports Using SOA ManagerPerform the Create Logical Ports Using SOA Manager activity in Customizing for SAP Portfolioand Project Management under Project Management Connection to External Systems

Integration with Collaboration Rooms . For more information see the documentation inCustomizing.

Creating/Changing the Room Back-End SystemYou create the room back-end system in the portal; it is the actual portal system itself. You needthe room back-end system to create the link for entering the room in the Room column in ProjectManagement.

In the portal, choose System Administration System Configuration KnowledgeManagement Collaboration Room Back-End Properties .

Setting Up the SAP Authentication TicketYou set up the SAP authentication ticket in the portal. For more information, see SAP NetWeaverLibrary on Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Library

SAP NetWeaver Security Guide User Administration and Authentication UserAuthentication and Single Sign-On . The following documents are particularly useful:

Configuring the J2EE Engine to Accept Logon Tickets

Adjusting the Login Module Stacks for Using Logon Tickets

If the test report CHECK_SSO_ACCESS_TO_PORTAL does not require any user identification, itmeans you successfully set up the trust relationship between Project Management and the portal.You execute this report in the Project Management system using transaction SE38.

Page 177: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 177

Performing Follow-On Activities - OptionalIt is necessary to perform all subsequent activities only if you are using a room template withpages that refer to the KM WebDAV, for example, if you used the SAP standard templatecProjects_Standard_Template to create a room.

Creating an External Alias for the WebDAV Repository ManagerTo create an external alias in the Project Management system:

1. Call Maintain Services (transaction SICF).

2. Choose the hierarchy type SERVICE and Execute.

3. Choose External Aliases.

4. Select the default_host node and choose Create.

5. Enter a name and description for the external alias.

The external alias on the Target Element tab page must refer to the/default_host/sap/cpro service node. You expand the tree to follow this path. The externalalias must start with a forward slash (/).

Activating ServicesCheck whether the service node for the WebDAV interface is active. If necessary, activate it asfollows:

1. Call Maintain Services (transaction SICF).

2. Choose the hierarchy type SERVICE and Execute.

3. Expand the tree down to the /default_host/sap/cpro node.

4. Call the context menu and choose Activate Service.

The service is already active if it is not possible to select Activate Service in the contextmenu.

Making Settings for the WebDAV Interface in Customizing for CollaborationProjects

1. Perform the Make Settings for the WebDAV Interface activity in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management by choosing Project Management Documents

Settings for the WebDAV Interface . For more information, see the documentation forthis activity.

2. Select the Project Management Act. indicator in this activity.

Creating the Project Management System as the HTTP System in the PortalCreate the Project Management system as the HTTP system in the portal. The WebDAVRepository Manager needs this information to access the document structure in ProjectManagement.

Page 178: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

178 October 2012

In the portal, choose System Administration System Configuration KnowledgeManagement Content Management Global Services System Landscape Definitions

Systems HTTP System .

Creating a Memory Cache in the PortalIn the portal, choose System Administration System Configuration KnowledgeManagement Content Management Utilities Caches Memory Cache .

Configuring the WebDAV Repository ManagerConfigure the WebDAV Repository Manager that is connected to the Project ManagementWebDAV interface in the portal.

In the portal, choose System Administration System Configuration KnowledgeManagement Content Management Repository Managers WebDAV Repository .

1. Enter a name and description for the WebDAV Repository Manager.

2. Create the prefix of the WebDAV Repository in the form /SAP_cProjects_<SystemID>_<Client>. The system ID and client refer to the Project Management system, forexample, /SAP_cProjects_PPT_002.

3. Use the HTTP system you created.

4. As the system path, enter the external alias you created for the WebDAV RepositoryManager in the Project Management system, followed by /dpr/.

5. Select Properties under Repository Services.

6. Enter the memory cache you created as described above.

Page 179: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 179

Configuring Integration with Document Management(DMS)If you are using document management (DMS) in Project Management, you can managedocuments there and exchange them within Project Management and with cFolders. To do this,you have to make settings in the SAP system in which DMS is running and in the ProjectManagement system.

Prerequisites

We recommend that you install SAP Easy Document Management 6.00 or higher on yourcomputer as this significantly simplifies the operation.

For more information, see the installation guide for SAP Easy Document Management which ison the program CD or supplied with the program download, and SAP Note 686932.

You have installed SAP Note 695088.

The authorization object S_RFC has been assigned to your user in the DMS system,with the following attributes:

o Activity: 16 (Execute)

o Name of the RFC object to be protected: OLR3_DMS_RFC

o Type of RFC object to be protected: FUGR

ProcedureSettings in the ERP System

1. Execute the Define Document Types activity in Customizing for Document Management.

o Assign the object link DPR_OBJLINK to the document types you want to use.

o In the Maintain Object Link Descriptions subview, create a new entry with theobject DPR_OBJLNK and the object text Project Management Element for eachlanguage that is used.

2. Create a new entry for the DPR_OBJLNK, screen = 271 object in the Maintain Screenfor Object Link activity.

3. In the Define Document Types activity, select the document type you want to use andcreate a new entry for the DPR_OBJLNK and screen number = 271 object in theSpecify Object Links subview.

Leave all other fields empty.

4. Execute the activity Define Default Document Types per Project Management System inCustomizing for Integration with Other SAP Components under Project Management.

Page 180: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

180 October 2012

5. If you want to change the standard logic for creating new document info records anddocument structures, implement the DMS Document Links in cProjects BAdI. Thismeans, for example, that you can activate the synchronous update instead of theasynchronous update, so that after creating a link to a new document info record, you nolonger need to update the view (method ASYNCHRONOUS_UPDATE_MODE, SwitchOff Asynchronous Updating for Object Links).

If you want to use the asynchronous update:

All changes you make to document info records and document structures in ProjectManagement are transferred asynchronously to document management (DMS) via qRFC(queued Remote Function Call) after the update in the Project Management system. Thistechnique ensures a sequential transfer. One exception is the exchange of documentsbetween document management and Project Management and between documentmanagement and a collaboration: these documents are saved in the appropriate systemstraightaway (Project Management, cFolders, or DMS).

If changes to document info records and document structures are not transferred todocument management, it may be due to the first Logical Unit of Work (LUW) in theoutbound queue that cannot be processed due to a communication problem and is nowblocking all other LUWs in the queue.

If this is the case, use transaction SMQ1 to analyze the CPROJECTS_R3DMS queue.This transaction enables you to display the status of the queue and restart it once thecause of the error has been eliminated.

You can also delete individual LUWs in this queue. However, note that this transfer willthen be lost and you will have to make the changes that belong to this LUW in the projectagain.

As soon as the communication problem has been solved, the system processessequentially all the other LUWs and therefore all queues that are dependent on oneanother.

6. Create an RFC destination for each Project Management system in transaction SM59.The destination name must correspond to the logical system name of the respectiveProject Management system.

Settings in the Project Management SystemMake the following settings in Customizing for Project Management:

1. Activate the DMS integration for the relevant project types by setting the DMS indicatorunder Define Project Types.

2. Use transaction SM59 to create an RFC destination to the SAP system in which yourdocument management is installed. If document management is installed in the samesystem, use the default internal RFC destination NONE.

3. Activate the new object type 0EASYDMS under Documents Define Object Links forDocuments in SAP DMS , or create your own object type using 0EASYDMS as atemplate.

Page 181: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 181

Enter the RFC destination that you activated in the previous step and specify the webserver.

If you want to disable the immediate multilevel explosion when you display the documentstructure of a document info record on the SAP DMS tab, you can use the BAdI DPR_DMS. Formore information, see Customizing for Project Management under Documents BAdI:Determine Explosion Mode for 'SAP DMS' Tab .

Page 182: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

182 October 2012

Preparing Integration with Supplier RelationshipManagementYou can create shopping carts in the Project Management system. To ensure that the categoriesused in the Project Management system are valid, the Project Management system reads thevalid categories from Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) when it creates a shopping cartat runtime using an RFC connection.

The rest of the time, Project Management and SRM communicate with each other via SAPNetWeaver Process Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI).

ProcedureIn the Project Management System

1. Set up the RFC connection for the SRM system in transaction SM59.

2. Perform the activity Specify Source System for SRM Categories in Customizing forProject Management. Select the SRM system under Source System.

3. Set up an IT/IBC connection to the System Landscape Directory (SLD) in transactionSM59.

In the SRM System1. Create categories using transaction COMM_HIERARCHY and check whether they exist in

the tables COMV_PRCAT_TEXT and COMM_APPLCATGRPR.

2. Assign the required categories to the SRM hierarchy, which is defined for purchasing.

3. Perform the activity Define Backend System for Product Category for the categories. Youdo this in Customizing for the SRM system under Supplier Relationship Management

SRM Server Technical Settings .

4. Perform the activity Define Backend System for the ERP system that is connected to theProject Management system. You do this in Customizing for the SRM system under

Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Technical Settings .

5. Set up an IT/IBC connection to the SLD in transaction SM59.

For more information, see the SRM documentation on SAP Service Marketplace and SAP Note1002895.

In the SLDRegister the Project Management instance and the SRM instance in the SLD.

In SAP NetWeaver PIContact your NetWeaver PI administrator as required when carrying out the following steps:

1. Set up an NetWeaver PI connection between Project Management and SRM.

2. Grant the NetWeaver PI user authorization to change data for the SRM system and theProject Management system.

Page 183: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 183

3. Grant the NetWeaver PI user in the Project Management system authorization to send e-mails.

For more information, see the NetWeaver PI documentation on SAP Service Marketplace andSAP Note 960237.

Page 184: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

184 October 2012

Making Settings for Portfolio ManagementIntegrationProjects must be assigned to a portfolio item in order to be taken into account in PortfolioManagement. An assignment can be created automatically when a portfolio item is created. If thisis not case, you can use integration with Project Management; in Project Management it ispossible to assign the project to an existing portfolio item or to create a portfolio item with anautomatic link assignment. Therefore, a project that has not yet been taken into account inPortfolio Management can now be included by creating the required assignment retrospectively.Through this assignment, Project Management can also become part of integration with DecisionFlow Management (DFM).

DFM uses assignments. Attributes, authorizations, and statuses may be synchronized among theassigned application objects when you save.

PrerequisitesYou have selected the Portfolio Management indicator in Customizing for Project Management bychoosing Structure Define Project Types .

Procedure1. Create a portfolio item or assign an existing portfolio item.

2. Assign or unassign sub-objects: project phases to item decision points.

3. Display data for an assigned object (via link click).

4. Delete assignments if required.

For more information, see SAP Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com under SAPBusiness Suite SAP Project and Portfolio Management Resource and Portfolio Management

Decision Flow Management (DFM) Initiative Manage Related Objects .

See also the following sections under Portfolio Management:

Defining Settings for Assigning a Project to an Item [External]

Defining Settings for Decision Flow Management [External]

Page 185: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 185

Making Settings for SAP Product DefinitionIntegrationThere are various settings you must make to be able to create object links in ProjectManagement for SAP Product Definition (SAP PD) concepts.

Procedure1. Configure a category TRFC destination in transaction SM59.

1. Enter the same description for the program ID and for the RFC destination.

2. Set the Registered Server Program indicator.

3. Enter the gateway host and gateway server of the Project Management server.You get this information from your IT department.

2. Enter the RFC destination in Customizing for Product Management under Define ObjectTypes for Object Links for the object type 0XPD_CONCEPT.

You do not have to enter the web server.

3. Create the JCo-RFC server on the SAP Product Definition page.

The server must have the same name as the RFC destination. For more information, seethe configuration guide for SAP Product Definition on the SAP Service Marketplace athttp://service.sap.com/instguides under SAP xApps SAP xApp ProductDefinition SAP xPD 2.0 .

4. Test the RFC connection.

Page 186: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

186 October 2012

Making Settings for Microsoft Project IntegrationYou can export projects from Project Management to Microsoft ® Project. You can also importprojects from Microsoft Project to Project Management. You have to configure the communicationbetween Project Management and Microsoft Project (MSP) for this integration with MicrosoftProject. In addition, you have to assign Project Management fields to MSP fields, and vice-versa.

PrerequisitesMicrosoft Project

You installed Microsoft Project on your local PC (refer to SAP Note 892638 for supportedMS Project versions.)

You activated ActiveX controls in your browser. When you carry out an import or exportfor the first time, the system asks you to install the ActiveX control supplied by SAP

Import and export to or from MS Project is supported only when either Internet Explorer or NWBCfor Desktop (with browser rendering from Internet Explorer) are used. It is not supported forFirefox, for example.

ProcedureMicrosoft ProjectAssign the Project Management fields to the MSP fields and the other way round. To do this,perform the following IMG activities in the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide under SAPPortfolio and Project Management Common Functions Import and Export of Project Data

Microsoft Project Integration :

1. Assign Fields for Import to Project Management

2. Assign Fields for Export from Project Management

If you want to map project structure elements from Microsoft Project to Project ManagementProject structure elements, you must implement the BAdI: Change Project Plan Data in ProjectManagement and Microsoft Project (0RPM_MSP_BADI_1), which is found the SAP CustomizingImplementation Guide.

The Import and Export UI in both Project Management and Portfolio Management usesOfficeControl UI element for Microsoft Office Project Integration. For more information, seeDefinition of Security Lists for OfficeControls.

ResultOnce you have carried out the configuration steps named above, users can synchronize theirproject plans (.mpp files) and they can import the data from .mpp files and export the data to .mppfiles as often as they like.

More InformationDefinition of Security Lists for OfficeControls [Page 165]

Page 187: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 187

Preparing Object Links to Other SystemsBusiness objects that are important to a development project can be located in different systems.Since it is important to have an overview of these objects in Project Management, you can linkobjects as object links to the application.

SAP supplies object links for selected objects, for example, for work breakdown structures andnetworks. Before you can use these, you have to define the RFC destinations for the system.

Procedure1. Define the RFC destinations in the SAP menu under Tools Administration

Administration Network RFC Destinations . If the connected system is the sameone as the Project Management system, use the default internal RFC destination NONE.

For more information, see the application under Help Application Help as well asunder Preparing Integration with cFolders.

2. You must ensure that it is possible to log on to the linked system without a logon screen.To ensure this, choose one of the two options described in Ensuring Logon Without theLogon Screen.

See also section Setting Up Object Links [Page 222].

Page 188: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

188 October 2012

Object Navigator Integration for Material and RecipeInitiative and item from Portfolio Management, and project, phase, and task from ProjectManagement can be linked to a material using an object link (Material in PLM Web UI), and arecipe using an object link (Recipe in PLM Web UI). The object navigator displays therelationships between these objects.

The object navigator for material and recipe in the SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAPPLM) system displays the linked SAP Portfolio and Project Management objects. The objectnavigator for the above mentioned SAP Portfolio and Project Management objects displays thelinked materials and recipes of the SAP PLM system.

You can start the object navigator using the You Can Also link or opening the created object linkin the application.

PrerequisitesYou have activated the following switches:

/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT – Switch to activate material-related Customizing entries(switch package /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT)

/PLM/PPM_SFWS_RCP – Switch to activate recipe-related Customizing entries (switchpackage /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_RCP)

/PLM/PPM_SFWS_GEN – Switch to activate Customizing entries of SAP Portfolio andProject Management objects (switch package /PLM/PPM_SFWS_GEN)

You have activated the following business functions:

For material, /PLMU/WEB_UI_2 (allocated switches: /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_GEN and/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_MAT)

For recipe, /PLMU/RCP_1 (allocated switches /PLMI/PPM_SFWS_GEN and/PLMI/PPM_SFWS_RCP)

ProcedureTo enable the integration with the object navigator for material and recipe, proceed as follows:

You define RFC destinations for the above mentioned object links. For more information aboutthe settings in Project Management, see Preparing Object Links to Other Systems [Page 187].For more information about the settings in Portfolio Management, see Preparing Object Links toOther Systems [External].

See also SM59 Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

Only if you have installed both SAP PLM and SAP Portfolio and Project Management on differentsystems, the following steps are required:

1. You define the external destinations for cross-system-enabled object types andrelationships in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes andTools for Enterprise Applications Object Navigator: Define Cross-System AccessSettings for Object Navigator or maintain view cluster /PLMB/V_NAV_XOT.

Page 189: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 189

2. You define the logical destination from the SAP Portfolio and Project Management ABAPsystem to the SAP PLM system as ‘HTTP connection to ABAP System’. Correspondingly,you define the logical destination from the SAP PLM ABAP system to the SAP Portfolioand Project Management system as ‘HTTP connection to ABAP System’. See also SM59Destinations and Portal System Aliases [Page 22].

3. You define the system alias and logical system within view /PLMB/V_RFC_LSYS for bothSAP Portfolio and Project Management and SAP PLM systems.

Page 190: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

190 October 2012

Preparing Integration with Cross-Application TimeSheetsTo integrate Project Management with Cross-Application Time Sheets (CATS), you must set up aconnection via Application Link Enabling (ALE). You do not have to set up this integration if CATSand Project Management are both on the same system and in the same client.

For more information about CATS integration without ALE, see SAP Note 913347.

PrerequisitesIn the ERP SystemYou set up an RFC connection to the Project Management system using transaction SM59(Configuration of RFC Connections).

In the Project Management System

You set up an RFC connection to CATS in ERP using transaction SM59.

You activate confirmation via CATS under Structure Define Project Types inCustomizing.

ProcedureProceed as follows to set up ALE:

In the ERP and Project Management Systems1. Call IDoc Interface /Application Link Enabling (ALE) (transaction SALE).

2. Prepare the sending and receiving systems.

3. Choose Basic Settings Logical Systems Define Logical System .

The logical system must have the same name as in the RFC connection.

In the ERP System1. Call Display Distribution Model (transaction BD64).

2. Either

o Create a new model view and enter a BAPI, then enter TSCPRCONNE underObject Name/Interface in the model view and TRANSFERCPR under Method;

or

o If you have installed SAP ECC 6.0, SAP_APPL EHP3 and activated the businessfunction BF CA_CATS_CPR_CORE, choose Add BAPI, then enter TSCPRCONNEunder Object Name/Interface and DETAILCPR under Method.

3. Choose Generate Partner Profiles in the Environment menu.

Page 191: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 191

4. Then choose Edit Model View Distribute .

In the Project Management System1. In transaction BD64, go to the model distributed from ERP.

2. Choose Environment Generate Partner Profiles .

Page 192: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

192 October 2012

Ensuring Logon Without the Logon ScreenIf you want to use object links or collaborations, you need to be able to log on to the connectedsystem without the logon screen, otherwise communication errors could occur. To ensure this,you have the following options:

You create a trusted/trusting RFC connection between the two systems.

In this case, the Portfolio and Project Management system, as the client, is always thetrusted system, and the linked system, as the server, is always the trusting system.

You enable logon using Single Sign-On (SSO).

ProcedureTrusted/Trusting RFC Connection

1. In the trusting system (cFolders or SAP ERP), use transaction SMT1 to create thetrusted/trusting RFC connection to the trusted system (Portfolio and ProjectManagement).

The system creates a new connection with the name TRUSTED_SYSTEM[system name]in the Portfolio and Project Management system. This is for internal reasons and youcannot change it.

Note that errors may occur during the check when you create a trusted/trusting RFCconnection, if you work with different clients in the client and server.

2. In the SAP Menu in the Portfolio and Project Management system, open the RFCconnection to cFolders or mySAP ERP by choosing Tools Administration

Administration Network RFC Destinations .

3. Flag the system as the Trusted System under Logon/Security Security Options .

For more information, see SAP Note 128447.

Single Sign-OnMaintain the logon in transaction SM59 using Single Sign-On (SSO).

1. Choose SNC on the Logon/Security tab page and enter the required data.

2. Save your entries and activate the Active indicator.

For more information, see transaction SM59 under Help Application Help .

Page 193: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 193

Connecting Workforce DeploymentIf you install Workforce Deployment (WFD), you can select your resources in Project ResourcePlanning by their availability.

WFD is a central service for managing human resources. It contains all data relevant for planning,such as human resources and their availability and qualifications, and human resourcerequirements.

PrerequisitesYou have installed WFD as an add-on together with Project Management on the SAP NetWeaversystem.

ProcedurePerform the following activities in Customizing for the WFD system. Enter NONE to use the defaultinternal RFC destination NONE each time:

Collaboration Projects Resource Management Workforce Deployment WorkforceDeployment Server Business Settings for WFD Server SAP HCM Integration

Define Logical System .

Collaboration Projects Resource Management Workforce Deployment WorkforceDeployment Server Business Settings for WFD Server SAP HCM IntegrationDefineRFC Destination .

Always enter the application type PRP here: Collaboration Projects ResourceManagement Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server BusinessSettings for WFD Server SAP HCM Integration Define Application System .

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 194: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

194 October 2012

Identity ManagementYou use this function to manage the data of your employees across different SAP systems, suchas SAP Portfolio and Project Management, or SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAPHCM), using SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1.

Identity Management for SAP Portfolio and Project Management enables efficient and securemanagement of users and authorizations based on the assignment of roles to an identity; theseassignments may change over time. Assigning roles to an identity increases administrativeefficiency for day-to-day tasks related to Identity Management across the system landscape, andhelps you to fulfill legal requirements related to SAP Governance, risk governance, risk andcompliance tasks, security reviews, and audits. The users created from SAP NetWeaver IdentityManagement have the standard user configuration.

The SAP Identity Management system creates an identity for each employee. When you transferthe identity to SAP Portfolio and Project Management, the system creates a user and a businesspartner (BP) with the Processor business partner role. It also creates a Central Person for the BPthat manages the user ID, the personnel number, and the BP data.

BP creation is optional. You use the BAdI definition /RPM/IDENTITY_MAN to create BPs.

The following PFCG roles are provided by Identity Management for SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement:

Technical Name Role Name

SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR Portfolio Management: Administrator

SAP_XRPM_USER Portfolio Management: User

SAP_CPR_PROJECT_ADMINISTRATOR Project Management: Project Lead

SAP_CPR_TEMPLATE_ADMINISTRATOR Project Management: Template Responsible

SAP_CPR_USER Project Management: User

SAP_BPR_PPM SAP Portfolio and Project Management PFCGrole for NW BC

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER Role for Usage of BCV in Project Management

SAP_CPR_BCV_USER_COMP User of BCV in Project Management

SAP_RPM_BCV_USER Portf. Mgmt BCV Authorization

SAP_RPM_BCV_USER_COMP Portf. Mgmt BCV User Profile

The system administrator assigns these roles to users that are created in SAP NetWeaverIdentity Management. The user creation is ABAP-based.

Page 195: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 195

PrerequisitesYou have mapped the SAP HCM personnel area or sub-area to an SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement-specific location in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Managementunder Portfolio Management Base System Interfaces SAP Human Capital Integration DataDistribution from SAP HCM to SAP xRPM Map Personnel Areas to Locations . This setting isrequired only if you want to create BPs.

The background user in Identity Management, which is used for the RFC calls to the SAPPortfolio and Project Management application (when transferring identities), must have theauthorization of the PFCG role SAP_XRPM_ADMINISTRATOR. This role can update accesscontrol lists for SAP Portfolio and Project Management entities (such as portfolio or bucket), andcreate users and business partners in the SAP Portfolio and Project Management application.

ProcedureIn the Portfolio and Project Management application, there is a transfer to enable the BPapplication-specific creation scenario based on the employee information in the SAP HCMsystem. This process is currently done through SAP ERP HCM–SAP RPM ALE integration. Areport is executed in the SAP ERP HCM system for a particular employee ID. The details of thisemployee are transferred as a Business Partner to the Portfolio and Project Managementapplication.

User and business partner creation (optional) in transaction SU01 (User Maintenance) aresupported by SAP NetWeaver Identity Management. Unlike the ALE integration scenario, whereonly a BP is created in the SAP Portfolio and Project Management application, the IdentityManagement function enables the creation of users and BPs. However, the SAP NetWeaverIdentity Management scenario does not replace the existing SAP ERP HCM–ALE integrationscenario. The SAP NetWeaver Identity Management and the SAP ERP HCM–ALE integrationscenarios co-exist.

An SAP Portfolio and Project Management user created by Identity Management and the creationof the BP based on certain mapping (via SAP Portfolio and Project Management-specific BAdIimplementations) is supported. SAP NetWeaver Identity Management supports the creation andupdate of BPs with only basic attributes. The SAP ERP HCM–ALE integration scenario can berun later to transfer the SAP HCM employee attributes, such as availability, to the BP alreadycreated using SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.

We recommend that you create a user together with a BP and then execute the SAP ERP HCM–SAP RPM integration scenario.

Page 196: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

196 October 2012

Data ReplicationPurposeData replication comprises the replication of Customizing data, master data, and transaction data.This includes, for example:

Activities to initially transfer data from the Online Transaction Processing System (OLTP)into the Online Analytical Processing System (OLAP)

Automatic replication activities

Manual replication activities (for example, if automatic replication is not possible)

Page 197: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 197

Setting Up Project Management with HCM in SAPPLMCarry out the activities in the sections below only if you are using Project Management in thestand-alone version or in combination with a CRM system. In this case, your SAP HCM isinstalled on a different system than Project Management. If you have installed ProjectManagement on an ERP system, continue with the section Setting Up Project Management withHCM in SAP ERP [Page 206].

Page 198: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

198 October 2012

Defining Inbound ProcessingIn Project Management, employees are represented as business partners in the role ofEmployee.

If your SAP HCM runs in a system other than Project Management, you have to use ALE toredistribute the organizational plan (organizational structure), including the employees that belongto it (master data, organizational assignment, and qualifications profiles), from the SAP HCMsystem to the Project Management system. To do this, you first define the inbound processing ofthe data to be distributed.

You can use the HRALE00INBOUND_IDOC and HRBAS00INFTY Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) forthis purpose. To display the definitions, you can use transaction SE18. You can use concreteimplementations of the interface for the BAdIs PRP_P_HRALE and PRP_CP_BUFFER afteractivating them by using transaction SE19.

If you do not have an SAP HCM system, you can create an organizational plan, businesspartners, and qualifications profiles manually. To do so, carry out the following Customizingactivities in:

Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data [External]

Creating an Organizational Structure

Creating a Business Partner

Defining Qualifications [Page 272]

ProcedureCall transaction SE19 and activate the following BAdIs:

HRALE00INBOUND_IDOC with the PRP_P_HRALE implementation

HRBAS00INFTY with the PRP_CP_BUFFER implementation

Page 199: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 199

Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE toProject ManagementYou perform this activity if you want to distribute the qualifications catalog from the SAP HCMsystem to Project Management using ALE.

If you do not have an SAP HCM system, you can create the qualifications profiles manually. Todo so, perform the activity Defining Qualifications in Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data[External].

If you do not want to distribute employee qualifications to Project Management, you do not haveto distribute the qualifications catalog nor set up the scales that belong to it in the system.

PreparationThe scales for the qualifications proficiencies are not distributed by ALE because the data isCustomizing data. This data must be transferred via a normal transport from the SAP HCMsystem. Alternatively, you can transfer the settings by synchronizing the tables. The view clusterVC_T77SK groups together the following required tables:

Table Name Description

T77SK Scales

T77SP Quality scale proficiency

T77SP_DESCR Proficiency description for a quality scale

T77SP_DESCRIPT Proficiency description for a quality scale - text

T77TS Scale names

T77SN (optional) Quantity scale proficiency

Control Table T77S0If you are working with an SAP system in which SAP Note 550055 is implemented, you must alsomake the following settings:

Caption Semantic Attr. Value Attr. Description

HRALX PQUAL X Transfer qualifications for employee

Prerequisites You implemented SAP Note 677924.

You defined the RFC destinations for the SAP HCM system. You do this in the SAPMenu under Tools Administration Administration Network RFC Destinations .

Page 200: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

200 October 2012

Procedure1. Carry out the steps described in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management

under Project Management Resource Management Basic Settings for ResourceManagement Application Link Enabling (ALE) for HR Integration .

For more information about setting up ALE distribution, see SAP Notes 390380 and312090. If you did not integrate the employee qualifications in the distribution model, youdo not need to distribute the qualifications catalog.

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

2. In transaction PFAL, trigger the distribution of the qualifications catalog in the SAP HCMsystem; use the evaluation path QUALCATA for selecting qualifications catalog data.

For more information, choose Help Application Help from the transaction.

See also Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management.

Page 201: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 201

Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE toProject ManagementYou perform these activities if you want to use ALE to distribute the organizational plan(organizational structure), including the employees, from the SAP HCM system to the ProjectManagement system.

In Project Management, employees are represented as business partners in the role ofemployee, that is, each time you transfer employees' master data from the SAP HCM system, acorresponding business partner is created or updated for each employee in the target system(Project Management).

In addition, the employees' organizational assignment and qualifications profiles are transferred tothe Project Management system via ALE.

If you do not have an SAP HCM system, you can create an organizational plan, businesspartners, and qualifications profiles manually. To do so, perform the following Customizingactivities:

Setting Up Component-Specific Master Data [External]

Creating an Organizational Structure

Creating a Business Partner

Distributing Master Data (ALE)You must distribute at least the following infotypes from the SAP HCM system to ProjectManagement:

Infotype Description Purpose

0000 Actions Used to select active employees only

0001 Organizationalassignment Organizational assignment, position

0002 Personal data Name, date of birth, SSN, and so on

0006 Addresses Employee addresses

0105 Communications System user ID, email address, phone/fax numbers,and so on

1000 Objects Defines business objects (organizational structure,qualifications catalog)

1001 Relationships Defines business relationships

1025 Validity Validity of qualifications

1028 Addresses Organizational structure addresses

1033 Proficiencies Qualifications and their proficiency scales

Page 202: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

202 October 2012

In the ALE distribution model, use either the settings described in SAP Note 312090 for infotypes,objects, subtypes, and types of the linked object, or one of the two templates HR-ALX-CRM-Q orHR-ALX SRM/CRM, which are provided with SAP Note 615896.

Control Table T77S0You make the following settings in a Project Management system:

Group Semantic Attr. Value Abbr. Description

HRALX HRAC X

HRALX OBPON ON Integration org. unit and business partner

HRALX PBPON ON Integration of employee and business partner

Prerequisites You implemented SAP Note 677924.

You defined the RFC destinations for the SAP HCM system. You do this in the SAPMenu under Tools Administration Administration Network RFC Destinations .

You defined the distribution model for HCM master data and the partner profiles thatbelong to it and distributed them to Project Management. You make these settings intransaction SALE or in Customizing under SAP Web Application Server ApplicationLink Enabling . Note that the central person object (object type CP) is not defined in thedistribution model and therefore cannot be distributed.

You compared the name formats used in the Project Management system with those inthe HCM system. You do this either by means of a transport or by synchronizing tables.You can enter the data manually via transaction SA13 in Project Management, ifnecessary.

You assigned the forms of address to the gender of the employee. You do this inCustomizing for Cross-Application Components by choosing SAP Business Partner

Business Partner Basic Settings Forms of Address Maintain Forms of Address.

The form of address of the employee as well as his or her marital status must beconverted in the same way in Project Management. You make these settings inCustomizing for Customer Relationship Management by choosing Master Data

Business Partner Integration Business Partner-Employee Compare Data Formatsif you use SAP Portfolio and Project Management in a CRM environment.

You defined the field check at country level in Project Management the same as for theHCM system. This ensures that data formats are also processed correctly in ProjectManagement. You can set up the field checks via the table maintenance view V_005_B.

Page 203: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 203

Procedure1. Carry out the steps described in Customizing for Project Management under Resource

Management Basic Settings for Resource Management Application Link Enabling(ALE) for HR Integration .

(For more information about setting up ALE distribution, see SAP Notes 390380 and312090.)

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

2. In transaction PFAL, start distributing the HCM data from the SAP HCM system to theSAP PLM system. Follow the instructions in SAP Note 363187 to avoid incompletelyposted IDocs.

For more information, choose Help Application Help from the transaction.

See also:

Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE to Project Management

Page 204: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

204 October 2012

Setting Up HCM Master Data for Conversion toProject ManagementYou perform this activity if you want to distribute master data from HCM but do not want to fullycreate this data in Project Management. This function is often used to depersonalize such datafrom HCM as, for example, dates of birth or addresses. However, since Project Managementrequires this data for all its functions to work, you use data conversion instead of filtering from theIDocs.

Prerequisites You have access to Customizing for the connected HCM system.

You have authorization to change the settings in Customizing for SAP xApp Resourceand Portfolio Management (SAP xRPM) under Activate Business Content DataSources Base System Interfaces SAP Human Capital Management Integration

Common System Configuration and SAP HCM ALE Setup Application Link Enabling(ALE) Modelling and Implementing Business Processes Converting Data BetweenSender and Receiver .

Procedure1. In HCM, define the conversion rules for each segment type that contains data to be

depersonalized. Make the setting under Create Rule, or use transaction BD62.

If, for example, you want to depersonalize the date of birth of an employee, you have todefine a conversion rule for segment E1P0002.

2. In HCM, define the conversion rules for each field label in the segment type you chose.Make the setting under Maintain Rule, or use transaction BD79.

3. Assign the conversion rules to the message type you are using in master datadistribution. By assigning the conversion rule to the target system, you define whichdistribution models are affected by the conversion.

Make the setting under Assign Rule to a Message Type, or use transaction BD55.

Page 205: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 205

Preparing Data Replication for WFDWhen you use Workforce Deployment (WFD), you must replicate the data from the HR system inWFD.

ProcedureMake the following settings in your HR system:

1. To map time data from HR as WFD time specifications, perform the Integration withWorkforce Management Core activity in Customizing for Time Management.

2. To prepare the distribution of time data from the HR system in WFD, make the followingentries in Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Maintain Distribution Model andDistribute Views via Insert BAPI:

Model view: An existing or new model view for the integration with the HR

Client: The HR system

Server: The project management system

Object name: WFMResource

Methods: ChangeAvailabilityMultiple

3. To ensure that the time data is distributed periodically in WFD, schedule the RPTWFMIFreport regularly, such as every night. This report creates time data as time specificationsin WFD.

Note that the system automatically assigns the time zone of your HR system to the timedata of a resource.

When you distribute qualifications, the system does not transfer the depreciation meterand validity of a qualification.

Page 206: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

206 October 2012

Setting Up Project Management with HCM in SAPERPThis section is relevant to Project Management from Support Package 2 onwards and to ERP asof Support Package 1. Only carry out the steps described in this section if you are using ProjectManagement in combination with an ERP system. In this case, your HCM is installed on the samesystem as Project Management.

In Project Management, employees are represented as business partners in the role ofEmployee. If you use your HCM and Project Management in the same system, you must ensurethat each employee in HCM is also a business partner (BP) with the appropriate data in ProjectManagement.

PrerequisitesCheck that the default internal RFC destination NONE is available. If this is not the case, contactyour system administrator.

Procedure1. In Customizing for Project Management, deactivate the use of WFD Core for the

qualification matchup and the search by deleting the X under Value abbr. in the activityActivate Qualification Matchup and Search Using WFM Core.

2. Define the number range of the business partner. If you want to align the businesspartner numbers with employee numbers, where, for example, employee number 1751corresponds to business partner number 9000001751, or create and assign other numberranges, carry out the following steps:

1. Number range grouping

In this activity, you create business partners with external number ranges andassign number range groups.

1. Call transaction SM30.

2. On the Maintain Table Views: Initial Screen, enter table T77S0.

3. Choose Maintain.

4. On the Change View "System Table": Overview screen, choose Position.

5. In the Another Entry dialogue box, enter the group name HRALX.

6. Choose data records with semantic abbreviations as listed below andenter or change values accordingly:

Grpname

Semanticabbr.

Value sem.abbr. Description

HRALX PNUMB 3Number AssignmentBusiness Partner(Employee)

Page 207: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 207

Grpname

Semanticabbr.

Value sem.abbr. Description

HRALX PSUBG MD Business PartnerSubgroup (Employees)

7. Choose Save.

You use these settings to specify that business partners are created withexternal number range PNUMB. You also define which number range thesystem uses for the number range assignment.

You create the number range grouping MD in the next step.

2. Define number range for business partners

1. Call transaction BUCF or in the SAP menu, choose Cross ApplicationComponents SAP Business Partner Basic Settings NumberRanges and Groupings Define Number Ranges .

2. On the Central Business Partners screen, choose Intervals.

3. On the Maintain Number Range Intervals screen, choose Insert Interval.

4. Insert the following values:

No. From number To number

MD 9000000000 9999999999

5. Choose Save.

You have defined the number range MD for the mapping number rangegrouping (also MD) with setting in T77S0.

3. Map number range grouping with number range

In this activity, you maintain groupings for business partners.

1. In Customizing for Project Management, choose Flexible Real EstateManagement (RE-FX) Business Partner General Settings forBusiness Partner Business Partner Basic Settings Number Rangesand Groupings Define Groupings and Assign Number Ranges .

2. On the Change View "BP Groupings": Overview screen, choose NewEntries.

3. Insert the following values:

Grouping Short Name Description Number Range

MD "Free Text" "Free Text" MD

4. Choose Save.

The number range grouping MD is now mapped to number range MD tomap settings in table T77S0.

Page 208: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

208 October 2012

The business partner will be created with the business partner ID9XXXXHREMPID.

4. Activate the integration between business partners in Project Management andHCM

When you activate integration, you ensure the automatic creation of a businesspartner when creating a new employee.

1. Call transaction OO_CENTRAL_PERSON or choose ResourceManagement Business Partner Set Up Integration of HR .

2. Make the following entries in the table:

Group Sem. Abbr. Value abbr Description

HRALX HRAC X Activate HR Integration

3. The integration between HCM and Project Management is now activated.

4. Start the HR_SYNC_PERSON report. The report creates a new businesspartner in the Employee role from newly-created employees or changesexisting business partners according to the changes made to theemployee data. You can select new employees directly or enter them viaa particular time period for changes or via the organizational unit.

5. To ensure that new employees or changes to the data are alwaysupdated in Project Management, schedule the HR_SYNC_PERSONreport to run daily.

You perform the following step only if you are using WFM Core.

6. To ensure that changes to the data are always updated in ProjectManagement, schedule the RPTWFMIF report. Make sure that thecorresponding WDF resources exist.

Page 209: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 209

Business CustomizingPurposeThis section contains information about the Customizing settings in each system. BusinessCustomizing adjusts the company-neutral delivered functionality to the specific requirements ofthe company.

This involves, for example:

Organizational unit Customizing

Master data Customizing

Process Customizing

ProcedurePerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 210: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

210 October 2012

Project Management

Page 211: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 211

Defining Time UnitsSpecify the time units you use to plan the required capacity of your resources in ProjectManagement. These time units are used for defining project types (see Defining Settings for theProject Structure [Page 212]).

If you want to use the function for evaluating resources in the SAP Business InformationWarehouse (BW), you must configure the same unit for each of the project types, as thevalues in the BW are simply added together independently of the time units.

If you use the accounting integration functions, the time units you define here must existin the Accounting system and be defined in the same way.

ProcedureDefine time units in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under ProjectManagement Basic Settings Define Time Units .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 212: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

212 October 2012

Defining Settings for the Project StructureIn this procedure, you define the object types for various objects that you work with in ProjectManagement. You also define the reasons for a project, as well as business processes that aremapped by tasks and checklist items.

Default entries are supplied with the standard system. However, you can also define your ownadditional entries.

ProcedureCarry out the activities described in the following table. You can find them in Customizing for SAPPortfolio and Project Management under Project Management Structure

Activity What you should know

Define Project TypesYou use the project type to group your projects. You can use thesegroups, for example, in evaluations.

Examples: Development project, consulting project

Define PrioritiesYou use the priority to indicate the importance of a project.

Examples: High, medium, low

Define Project ReasonYou use the project reason to explain why a project is beingexecuted.

Examples: Change of raw material, customer request

Define ProcessYou use the processes to define the business processes that aremapped by the tasks and checklist items.

Examples: Purchasing, shipping

Define Phase TypesYou use the phase types to group phases and you specify therequirements according to which the phase is approved.

Examples: Development, production

Define ChecklistTypes

You use the checklist types to group checklists and therebydetermine to which work area a checklist belongs.

Examples: Specimen, prototype

Define Task TypesYou use the task types to group tasks and thereby determine towhich work area a task belongs.

Examples: Release, approval

Define Object Typesfor Object Links

You activate the object types for which you want to create objectlinks in your project.

Examples: Sales order, BOM

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 213: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 213

You can deactivate the following objects as required:

Project types

Phase types

Checklist types

Task types

To do this, go to Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under ProjectManagement Structure and then deselect the Active indicator for any of the following:

1. Define Project Types

2. Define Phase Types

3. Define Checklist Types

4. Define Task Types

(The Active indicator is selected by default.)

Page 214: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

214 October 2012

Defining RolesA role represents a position in a project that is to be filled by a business partner — for example,the role of consultant in a consulting project.

The role describes which type of resource is required in a project, that is, which function theresource carries out in the project. The role includes information about the qualifications that theresource should have and when and for how long the resource should be available.

A similar resource description exists in Organizational Management. Here, the resources requiredfor the organizational plan are described by the positions.

In this activity, you specify which types of roles you require for Resource Management.

For more information about roles, see the SAP Library for Project Management on SAP HelpPortal at http://help.sap.com under Project Management Resource Management ProjectRoles .

ProcedureDefine roles in Customizing for Project Management under SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement Project Management Resource Management Basic Settings for Roles

Define Role Types .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 215: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 215

Preparing PrintingTo print project elements in Project Management or to create project status reports, you needprint forms which specify what information is to be printed and the layout. SAP supplies referenceprint forms in the standard system. You can add your own print forms.

Project Management uses SAP PDF-Based Forms by Adobe and SAP Interactive Forms. Youcan still use existing Smart Forms (except approval forms and project status report forms), forexample if you are upgrading from previous releases. The content of Smart Forms is not beingdeveloped any further.

PrerequisitesAn installation of the Adobe Document Services (ADS) is required for printing. For moreinformation about setting up ADS, see the Adobe Document Services Configuration Guide NW2004s on the SAP Development Network at http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/adobeunder ADS Configuration.

You have set up an RFC connection ADS for Printing in transaction SM59. If digital signatures areused in the approval process, a secure RFC connection ADS_HTTPS is also required.

If you want to use the ALV table print function, you have to set up printing for Web Screen ABAPALV in Customizing for SAP NetWeaver by choosing Application Server SAP List Viewer(ALV) Set-Up Printing for Web Screen ABAP ALV Set-Up Web Service Destination for AdobeDocument Services .

ProcedureTo set up PDF-based forms, perform the following activities in Customizing for ProjectManagement under Basic Settings Forms for Printing and for Project Status Reports :

1. Create new forms under Create PDF-Based Forms.

We recommend creating new forms by copying the forms that SAP provides. You maynot change the interface.

2. Create a BAdI implementation for the new forms using the BAdI: PDF-Based Forms(DPR_PDF_FORM).

Do not make any changes to the methods of the new implementation as this my preventthe new forms from working.

Along with the form, copy the implementation of the BAdI to a new BAdI implementation.You use the new form as the filter value in this BAdI implementation. You can find theBAdI implementation for the original form by searching for the implementation of the BAdIdefinition DPR_PDF_FORM with the original form as the filter value.

3. Under Activate Forms per Project Type, activate the forms for all the project types inwhich they should be available.

Page 216: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

216 October 2012

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Optional: Following step 3 above, if you wish, you can activate existing Smart Forms. Make surethat a PDF-based form with an identical name has not been activated for the project type. If formswith identical names have been activated for a project type, the system uses the PDF form.

Page 217: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 217

Preparing the Creation of Project Status ReportsIn Project Management you can create project status reports and store them in ProjectManagement or in SAP document management (DMS) by implementing various settings.

Procedure1. In Customizing for Project Management under Define Project Types, activate the project

types for which project status reports can be created and choose where the reportsshould be stored.

o If you want to store reports in Project Management, set the Status Reportsindicator.

o If you want to store the reports in SAP document management, activate the DMSfunction and set the StatusReport DMS indicator (Store Status Reports inDocument Management).

2. If you use SAP document management for storage, use transaction SM59 to create anRFC destination for the SAP system in which your document management is installed.

If document management is installed in the same system, you do not need to carry outthis step.

3. If you are using SAP document management for storing the reports, execute the DefineObject Links for Project Status Reports in DMS IMG activity:

o If document management is installed in a different system, enter the RFCdestination that you activated in the previous step and specify the web server.

o If document management is installed in the same system, enter the default nameNONE to use the default internal RFC destination NONE.

4. To create your own templates for project status reports, you must execute the followingIMG activities:

o Create PDF-Based Forms

o Activate Templates per Project Type

o BAdI: PDF-Based Forms (DPR_PDF_FORM)

See also Preparing Printing [Page 215].

Page 218: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

218 October 2012

Specifying Display Details for Business PartnersInformation about business partners is displayed in Resource Management. In this activity, youcan determine the information that you want to be displayed.

ProcedureDefine the details in Customizing for Project Management under SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement Project Management Resource Management Business Partner DefineDisplay Details for Business Partner .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 219: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 219

Making Settings for Sending E-Mails and GroupwareIn this activity, you include SAP Smart Forms as templates for e-mails and groupware tasks inResource Management.

You can send the templates that you define in this activity to the assigned resources or theirmanagers directly from the person and task assignment functions in the Resource Managementapplication.

Prerequisites You can send e-mails from the application provided that your browser supports the

creation and sending of e-mails or calls an e-mail program when you click the mail-tofunction.

The forms are located in client 000 in the standard system. Before you can use the forms,you must first copy all texts beginning with PRP* to the current client via a client copy.Call transaction SO10 and go to Utilities Copy from Client .

Procedure1. To get an overview of the forms that SAP provides for using in project resource planning,

in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management, open the activity ResourceManagement Basic Settings for Resource Management Assign Forms for E-Mail andGroupware Communication .

2. To adapt the forms to your requirements, proceed as follows:

1. Open the smartforms transaction.

2. In Form, enter the <smartform> that you want to change.

3. Choose Change.

4. Make the required changes and save the form.

3. Make the settings in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management underProject Management Resource Management Basic Settings for Resource

Management Assign Forms for E-mail and Groupware Communication . Thechanged forms are available here.

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 220: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

220 October 2012

Making Settings for the Control PlanIf you want to work with a control plan in Project Management, you must define the followingobjects:

Categories

If you enter the same description for the categories as for the phases (see the DefinePhase Types IMG activity), the Project Management users have the option of linking thecontrol plan to a phase by assigning the appropriate category.

Process steps

Characteristics

Tools

Test systems

Sample frequencies

Predefined entries are delivered in the standard system. However, you can also define your ownentries.

Control plans (including control plan templates, search for control plan objects, and so on) areobsolete (see SAP Note 1114207) and invisible by default, but can be enabled (which is notrecommended); see SAP Note 1404960.

ProcedurePerform the following activities in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Project Management Control Plan :

Define Categories for Control Plans

Define Process Steps in Control Plan

Define Control Plan Characteristics

Define Tools in Control Plan

Define Test Systems in Control Plan

Define Sample Frequency

If you want to generate routings or inspection plans in the SAP system from the controlplan, implement the Business Add-In BAdI: Object Creation in Control Plan(CPRO_STRUK_CP_PRFPLN).

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 221: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 221

Defining EvaluationsYou can perform evaluations for your projects in Project Management. SAP supplies predefinedevaluations. However, you can also define your own evaluations.

PrerequisitesA user needs authorization for the authorization object CPRO_EVAL to be able to use anevaluation. Assign the authorization object to the users via a role, for example, SAP_CPR_USER.

ProcedureTo define evaluations, carry out the following activities in Customizing for SAP Portfolio andProject Management under Project Management Evaluations :

Define Attributes and Object Types for Evaluations

Define Extract Layouts

Assign Extract Layouts to Project Types

Define Evaluations

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 222: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

222 October 2012

Setting Up Object LinksWith Project Management, SAP delivers object links (deactivated by default) to the following SAPobjects:

SAP Object Type Object Type in Project Management

Project definition(PS) 0PROJECTDEF

WBS element (PS) 0WBSELEMENT

Network (PS) 0NETWORK

Networkactivity/element (PS) 0NETWORKACT

Document (DMS) 0DOCUMENT

Inspection plan (QM) 0INSPECTIONPLAN

Plant material (LO) 0PLANTMATERIAL

Purchase order item(MM) 0PURCHORDITEM

Internal order (CO) 0INTERNALORDER

Sales order (SD) 0SALESORDER

Inspection lot (QM) 0INSPECTIONLOT

Notification (QM)(creation optional) 0QMNOTIFICATIOC

Notification (QM) 0QMNOTIFICATION

Routing (PP) 0ROUTING

Control Plan (QM) 0CONTROLPLAN

Project ManagementProject 0CPROJECTS

CRM MarketingCampaign 0CRMCAMPAIGN

Project ManagementTask 0INMCPROTASK

Master InspectionCharacteristic (QM) 0MASTERINSPCHAR

Plant Material (MM) 0PLANTMAT_LONG

Page 223: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 223

SAP Object Type Object Type in Project Management

Maintenance Order(PM) 0PMORDER

Production Order(PP) 0PPORDER

Audit for Project 0PROJECTAUDIT

FMEA for Project 0PROJECTFMEA

Customer Inquiry(SD) 0SD_INQUIRY

Customer Quotation(SD) 0SD_QUOTATION

xPD Concept 0XPD_CONCEPT

iPPE - CMP Node 0IPPECMPNODE

iPPE - CMP Variant 0IPPECMPVARIANT

iPPE - CON Variant(Concept) 0IPPECONVARIANT

iPPE - Focus 0IPPEFOCUS

Shadow Object LinkType for Object LinkCreation from iPPE

0IPPESHADOW

This object link type is only required for internal purposes for creatingobject links between Project Management and iPPE from an iPPEsystem. Therefore, you only have to specify the destination of thecorresponding iPPE system in Customizing for Project Managementby choosing Connection to External Systems Object Links inSAP Systems Make Settings for the Linked SAP Objects .

You can also create object links to project definitions in Project Management (object type0CPROJECTS).

If you want to use additional object types, you must develop the relevant object links yourself. Formore information, see the Guide for Implementing an Object Link on the SAP ServiceMarketplace at http://service.sap.com/plm-inst under Using SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement.

Page 224: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

224 October 2012

ProcedureSettings in the Project Management SystemCarry out the following activities in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Project Management Connection to External Systems Object Links in SAP Systems:

Make Settings for Calling an SAP Transaction

Make Settings for the Linked SAP Objects:

1. Activate all links you want to use under Object Types for Object Links.

2. Select a link and choose (Details).

3. Under Destination, enter an RFC destination (see also Preparing Object Links toOther Systems).

The destination is required if you want to use the existence check, the searchhelp, or the data display for processing object links. Otherwise, these functionsare not available.

If you have installed the application that contains the linked object on the samesystem as Project Management, use the default internal RFC destination NONE.

4. Under Web Server, enter the ITS Web server or a Web Server Alias that youhave defined under Make Settings for Calling an SAP Transaction.

The server is required if you want to call a Web application for processing alinked object.

5. Make any changes you require to the rest of the entries, then save your data.

You can access information about the individual fields in the field help (F1).

6. Make any changes that you require to the default settings in the subactivities forObject Types for Object Links.

7. Repeat this procedure for every active object link.

A date retrieval function has been implemented for the object links to thefollowing objects:

Project definition

WBS element

Network

Network activity/element

Page 225: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 225

You can display the dates related to these objects in summarized form in a Ganttchart. To display the dates, you must specify the date type in the user settings inProject Management. If no date type is specified, the dates cannot be displayed.

Settings in the Connected SystemIf you want to create QM notifications from Project Management, you can implement the Creatinga QM Notification BAdI in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components under

Project Management Object Links from Project Management .

Page 226: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

226 October 2012

Setting Up the BW InterfaceProcedureCarry out the following activities in Customizing for Project Management under Connection toExternal Systems BW Interface :

Define BW Status Objects for the System Status

Generate DataSource for BW Status Objects

Define BW Status Objects for the User Status

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 227: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 227

Defining Settings for Accounting IntegrationProject Management provides an accounting integration function using single-object controlling ormultilevel controlling in SAP Controlling. This function transfers all costs incurred in a project for atask or role to the Controlling system and collects them in cost collectors. The cost collector is aninternal order or a WBS element, depending on the controlling scenario you use. It displays theaccount assignment object for all actual postings in the project.

Prerequisites To be able to use automatic account assignment, you must define the order type used for

single-object controlling and the project profile for single-object controlling for PS projectsfor the Business Scenario CPROJECTS in transaction IAOM0.

You created the order type CPR1 in Customizing or imported it from client 000 to theControlling system in which you want to replicate your projects and in which you want tocarry out costing. To do this, see Customizing for Controlling under Internal Orders

Order Master Data Define Order Types .

In this order type you can also specify a model order. SAP provides the model order$CPR1 (internal order), which you can import from client 000. You define new modelorders in Customizing for Controlling under Internal Orders Order Master Data

Screen Layout Define Model Orders .

If you want to specify your own object type for accounting integration for each projecttype, enabling you to replicate each project type in your own system, you must definemore than one object type. For more information, see the IMG activity Make GeneralSettings in Customizing for Project Management.

You created a project profile for WBS elements in Customizing for the Project System bychoosing Structures Operations Structures Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

Create Project Profile .

If you want to derive assignments for internal orders (such as company code) from SAPHCM Organizational Management, you must import the organizational structure fromOrganizational Management to Project Management (see Distributing the QualificationsCatalog via ALE to Project Management) and Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALEto Project Management). If you do not want to use this type of derivation and you do notwant to use a model order or project profile, define the derivation rules for assignmentusing a Business Add-In (BAdI).

For more information about derivation rules, see the documentation for ProjectManagement, specifically Accounting Integration Derivation of Organizational Data

.

The user requires the corresponding authorizations in the connected controlling system touse the accounting integration functions. For more information, see the application helpfor accounting integration.

ProcedureCarry out the following steps in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Project Management Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration .

Page 228: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

228 October 2012

1. Activate the accounting integration functions in the activity Activate Integration byentering the project types you require.

2. Under Define Object Links for Accounting Integration, define the object links forcommunication with Accounting.

3. Make the required settings for accounting integration in the activity Make GeneralSettings.

4. Define cost/revenue rates for costing in the activity Define Cost/Revenue Rates.

5. Replicate the rates in the activity Replicate Cost/Revenue Rates to the connected SAPsystem(s); this step is dependent on the destination defined in step 2.

The system requires a transport request with which to transfer the records to theproductive system after they are replicated in the Customizing system.

6. If you created new project types or reasons in Project Management, replicate them to theconnected SAP system in the activity Replicate Accounting-Relevant Characteristics.

Only the key and text are replicated. You do not require a transport request. However,you must transfer the project types or reasons you created to each target system one at atime.

7. Branch to Customizing in the ERP system via the Make Settings in mySAP ERP activityand edit the following activities under Single-Object Controlling for Projects:

o Create and Change Controlling Scenario

o Define Controlling Scenario

o Assign Cost Elements and Activity Types

You require the cost element for calculating external resources, the activity typefor calculating internal resources, and the revenue element for updatingrevenues.

o Define User-Defined Message Types

o Develop Enhancements

o If you want to change or add to costing data, create a BAdI implementation in theactivity BAdI: Project Management Costing Integration.

o To change selected controlling parameters, choose the BAdI ControllingParameter.

8. If you want to adjust or change the data transferred for replication and calculation whencommunicating with the ERP system, use the following BAdIs:

o Additional Attributes for Replication Using Single-Object Controlling(DPR_FIN_GECCO_ATTR)

o Change Costing Data for Single-Object Controlling (DPR_FIN_GECCO_CALC)

o Enhancement for Manual Multilevel Controlling (DPR_FIN_GECCO_MANUAL)

For more information, see the documentation for the activity.

Page 229: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 229

You can use the Customizing activity Make Project-Type-Specific Settings for AccountingIntegration to create, change, and display Customizing related to the accounting integration for aproject type. For more information, see Customizing for Project Management under AccountingIntegration Make Project-Type-Specific Settings for Accounting Integration .

Page 230: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

230 October 2012

Making Settings for ApprovalsYou can use user certificates for digital signatures of approvals.

Prerequisites You are using one of the supported browser versions (see SAP Note 1402912).

You have a user certificate that is suitable for digital signatures (for example, the singlesign-on certificate).

You have installed Adobe® Reader and Adobe Document Services.

ProcedureTo verify the signature, enter the corresponding root certificate in the certificate list of thePersonal Security Environment (PSE, transaction STRUST). For more information, see thedocumentation for the activity and the Adobe Document Services Configuration Guide in the SAPDeveloper Network at http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/adobe under ADS Configuration.

SAP Web Dynpro Active Component Framework (ACF)The ACF is a framework for integrating active components, such as ActiveX and Java Applets inWeb Dynpro. To install ACF, you require administration authorization on the client PC. To runACF, you must enable ActiveX in your Web browser. For more information about installing theACF, see SAP Note 766191.

Page 231: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 231

Creating Candidate Managers and Staffing ManagersIn order to utilize the staffing process within Project Resource Planning (PRP), you must assignCandidate Managers and Staffing Managers to organizational structures through organizationmanagement.

PrerequisitesYou have created the table entries for the Candidate Manager and Staffing Manager (requiredonly for mySAP CRM). For more information, see Create Candidate and Staffing Manager Entriesfor SAP CRM.

ProcedureYou use the following transactions to integrate Candidate Managers and Staffing Managers to theorganizational structures. Views for Candidate Manager and Staffing Manager are availablewithin these transactions.

You maintain the organizational structure using the following transactions:

PPOCE: Create root organizational unit

PPOME: Change existing organizational structure

PPOSE: Display existing organizational structure

For more information on utilizing organizational maintenance, see Organizational Plan.

Within SAP CRM, you maintain the organizational structure using the following transactions:

PPOCA_CRM: Create root organizational unit within SAP CRM

PPOMA_CRM: Change existing organizational structure within SAP CRM

PPOSA_CRM: Display existing organizational structure within SAP CRM

IntegrationPRP provides the following table linkages as part of its standard delivery:

Candidate Manager - 440

Staffing Manager - 441

Both connect an organizational unit with a permanent position and ensure that the resourceswithin the position are defined as Candidate and/or Staffing managers.

Only business partners associated with the staffing manager and/or candidate manager positionshave the authorizations for executing staffing and/or candidate management functionality withinthe staffing process. These authorizations are granted and revoked automatically by theapplication.

Page 232: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

232 October 2012

Creating Candidate and Staffing Manager Entries forSAP CRMUse this procedure when preparing to assign Project Resource Planning (PRP) CandidateManagers and Staffing Managers to the SAP CRM organizational structure so that they canutilize the PRP staffing process.

PrerequisitesYou define the members of your organization that are to fill the PRP roles of Candidate Managerand Staffing Manager. How you define the managers determines what processing they are ableto perform within the PRP staffing process.

Procedure1. Maintain table views using transaction SM30.

2. At the Table/View field, enter T77OMATGT.

3. Choose Maintain.

You are maintaining cross-client tables. This is protected by the special authorizationS_TABU_CLI. If you are not able to select Maintain, contact your system administrator forthis special authorization.

4. Double-click on Scenario Definition (Hierarchy Framework).

5. Select OMATTCRM.

6. Double-click on Request Definition.

7. Make the following entries:

Scenario ObjectType

Hierarchy FrameworkRequest

Request in Scenario forEach Object Type

OMATTCRM WFM_CANDIDATE_MANGEMENT Designate CandidateManagement

OMATTCRM CP WFM_CANDIDATE_MANGEMENT

OMATTCRM O WFM_CANDIDATE_MANGEMENT

OMATTCRM S WFM_CANDIDATE_MANGEMENT

OMATTCRM WFM_STAFFING_MANGEMENT Designate StaffingManagement

OMATTCRM CP WFM_STAFFING_MANGEMENT

OMATTCRM O WFM_STAFFING_MANGEMENT

OMATTCRM S WFM_STAFFING_MANGEMENT

Page 233: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 233

8. Save your entries.

ResultYou are able to assign Candidate Managers and Staffing Managers to SAP CRM organizationalunits. For more information, see Creating Candidate Manager and Staffing Manager.

Page 234: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

234 October 2012

Making Settings for Version ManagementProcedureTo use version management for a project type, you must make the following settings inCustomizing for Project Management:

1. Activate version management by setting the Versions indicator for the desired projecttypes in the Define Project Types IMG activity.

2. Define input templates in the Define Permitted Version Numbers activity. For moreinformation, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

3. Give Project Management users the authorization to create global versions by assigningthe CRPO_VSHDR authorization object to the SAP_CPR_USER role. Every ProjectManagement user automatically has authorization to create local versions.

We recommend that you allow only a small number of users to create global versions.

You define the following version templates:

Version Type Use Version Template

Snapshot Local LSNAP*

Simulation Local LSIM*

Snapshot Global GSNAP*

Simulation Global GSIM*

Each user automatically has authorization to create versions with the version numbersLS* because they are defined as local versions, and the CPRO_VSHDR authorizationobject refers only to version numbers with the usage type global.

For the version numbers GS*, you have to assign the authorization objectCPRO_VSHDR with the activity 03 (Display) to the SAP_CPR_USER role. All users withthe role SAP_CPR_USER are allowed to display the global versions but are not allowedto change them.

You issue the authorization for managing global versions (GS*), for example, to theSAP_CPR_TEMPLATE_ADMINISTRATOR role or to one of your own roles that youhave created especially for version management. Assign the authorization objectCPRO_VSHDR to this role with the following activities:

· 01 (Create or Generate)

· 02 (Change)

Page 235: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 235

· 03 (Display)

· 06 (Delete)

4. Define versions in advance, if necessary. For more information, see the help for ProjectManagement under Work with Versions.

Page 236: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

236 October 2012

Setting Up Field ControlField control allows you to tailor the field properties for both SAP fields and your own fields tomeet your requirements.

PrerequisitesYou have carried out the steps described in the documentation for the Set Up Field Control IMGactivity.

Procedure

Carry out the steps described below only if you have the appropriate background knowledge.

1. Make settings in the individual views as required.

When you save the settings, the system generates new classes for your field controlprofile and these inherit the methods of the SAP field control classes. These classes arelocal objects and have the class name /1CPR/CL_XXX_YYYYYY_ZZZ:

o /1CPR/ is a reserved namespace so that these classes are not overwritten byclasses with the same name that are created and supplied by SAP.

o XXX is the client identifier.

o YYYYYY stands for the field control profile that was set up.

o ZZZ is the ID of the object category (for example, DPO, PPO)

When you transport the Customizing setting from one client to another, the system alsogenerates the customer-specific classes when it imports the Customizing entries to thetarget client.

2. In order to use your field control for a project type, you must assign it to a project type(see Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under ProjectManagement Structure Define Project Types ).

Conditions that Influence “Field Control” ViewThe conditions that influence field control include authorization requirements and other additionalconditions, such as Customizing settings and constraints due to the status of the object.

The following conditions are defined for the project definition (object category DPO):

A001: The user has admin. authorization

A002: The user has write authorization

A003: The user has read authorization

C001: Object is released

Page 237: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 237

C002: CATS is active

C003: Confirmation for project definition

C020: Project is a version

The conditions A001 to A003 are evaluated after the authorization check. For objects in atemplate, the system checks the SAP authorization objects CPRO_*, so there are always twoconditions for the authorization check:

The user can create and change objects.

The user can display objects.

Condition C001 is evaluated according to the status query. Conditions C002 and C003 areconstraints from the Customizing settings for the project type.

The data and fields of a project element can influence each other. For this reason, for example,the Actual Work field (DPR_TS_API_PROJECT_O-ACTUAL_WORK) cannot be changed if conditionC020 is not true.

You can also define your own conditions in this view. To do this, you have to implement aschema program for each condition. When you save this Customizing setting, the systemgenerates code from the schema program in the appropriate class methods.

Note the following conventions for the schema program:

1. Program type of the schema program: Include Program.

2. Program name: Z_EVAL_CONDS_XXXX

XXXX stands for the ID of the condition that you redefined in this view, for example,Z001.

IDs that start with A* or C* are reserved for conditions defined by SAP (SAP namespace).

All other IDs can be used for conditions defined by customers (except for A* and C*), forexample, Z001.

3. Schema name in the schema program: /> EVAL_CI_XXXX</

XXXX stands for the ID of the condition that you redefined in this view.

4. The global table MT_CONDITIONS must always be filled in the schema program if thecondition is met. The CONDITION_ID field in the MT_CONDITIONS table contains thevalue MV_XXXX.

XXXX stands for the ID of the condition that you redefined in this view.

See also:For more information about implementing schema programs, see the function moduledocumentation of the SCHEME_INSTANTIATE function. You can use the schema programsEVAL_CONDS* as examples of schema programs that are used by default for field control inProject Management; they are located in the DEVELOPMENT_PROJECTS_FLD_CNTRLpackage.

For more information about using the field control, see SAP Note 947936.

Page 238: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

238 October 2012

“Group in Accordance with Authorization” ViewAll fields in the operational project are summarized in the following groups in view of theauthorization requirements:

G001: Changeable with admin. authorization

G002: Changeable with write authorization

G003: For display only

In project templates, the fields are summarized in the following groups:

G101: Changeable (authorization activity 01, 02)

G103: Can be displayed with read authorization

“Definition of Group” ViewIn this view, the groups are specified in detail.

Group G001 (Changeable with Admin. Authorization) has the following definition:

Condition Description of condition Effect if condition is met

A001 The user has admin. authorization The field can be changed

A002 The user has write authorization The field can be displayed

A003 The user has read authorization The field can be displayed

ResultThe final field property is determined from the evaluation of the authorization check and the checkfor the additional conditions.

The user has write authorization for the project definition; the project definition has the statusCreated. Confirmation for the project definition is set up in Customizing, CATS confirmation is notactive.

The field property for the Actual Work field (DPR_TS_API_PROJECT_O- ACTUAL_WORK) isdetermined as follows:

The Actual Work field is assigned to group G002 in the Assign Fields to Field Groupsview. If the user has write authorization, he or she can change the field. Therefore, thefield property is Changeable.

The status Created generally allows changes to the project definition. Therefore, the fieldproperty is Changeable.

Page 239: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 239

In the Field Ctrl Acc. to Addit. Conditions (per Field) view, the Actual Work field is influenced bythree conditions:

1. Changeable if the project is released, otherwise the field can only be displayed.Therefore, the field property is Can Be Displayed.

2. Can be displayed if CATS has been deactivated in Customizing, otherwise, it ischangeable. Therefore, the field property is Changeable.

3. Changeable if confirmation for the project definition is permitted, otherwise the field is notvisible. Therefore, the field property is Changeable.

The final field property for the Actual Work field is Can Be Displayed because Can Be Displayedhas a higher priority than Changeable.

Page 240: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

240 October 2012

Customizing Forecast DatesIn this procedure, you activate the authorized access to forecasted dates, which is available foreach project element.

ProcedureYou can activate the authorized access to forecasted dates for a project type in Customizing forProject Management by choosing Structure Define Project Types .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 241: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 241

Activating Project ChartersIn this procedure, you activate the project charter, which is available for the project definition.

Procedure1. You can activate the project charter for a project type in Customizing for Project

Management by choosing Structure Define Project Types .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

2. You can modify the Customizing supplied with the system for the project charter inCustomizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under Metrics Management

Common functions .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 242: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

242 October 2012

Configuring NavigationWith navigation configuration, the standard navigation can be modified or enhanced according tocustomer-specific processes. This means that the navigation functions of the workcenter anddashboards can be adjusted.

Procedure

There are no Customizing settings. All changes are modifications or enhancements.

Workcenter ScopeYou can modify the workcenter structure by adding or removing tabs:

1. Change the LaunchPad Customizing. The roles start with DPR_XXX (XXX = ObjectType) and the instance name is SCOPE.

2. In the case of new tabs: New Dashboard evaluation must be defined and implementedinto component DPR_WORKLIST_LOCATOR.

Dashboard ToolbarYou can modify the dashboard toolbar by adding or removing buttons, as well as button choices.See: WebDynpro component DPR_WORKLIST_LOCATOR; and View VI_LOCATOR, MethodFILL_CONTEXT; and Class CL_DPR_UI_LOG_LOCATOR MethodGET_VI_LOCATOR_VIEWDATA.

Detail Screen TabsYou can modify the sequence of the tabs (except: Structure and Resources) or hide tabs. Thiscan be done by changing the application configuration CPROJECTS_FPM.

The sequence change of subview tabs Detail, Table, and Graphic below the structure tab issupported without any additional effort.

Page 243: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 243

Defining Search Help for Project ManagementIn this procedure, you can define the search help for Project Management.

ProcedureYou can change the Customizing settings for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under

Common Functions Search Define Search Help for Project Management .

The default settings are provided in the Customizing client. We recommend that you copy thecontent of this Customizing activity and adapt it accordingly to your Customizing needs.

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 244: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

244 October 2012

Workforce Deployment

Page 245: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 245

Dispatcher SettingsProcedureTo configure dispatcher settings for the Workforce Deployment Server, you must perform thefollowing activities in Customizing for Project Management under Resource Management

Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server Dispatcher Settings :

Define Availability Horizon

Scheduling Strategy

liveCache Scheduling Strategy

Switch between liveCache and Built-In Dispatcher.

For more information, see the documentation for the activities.

Page 246: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

246 October 2012

Making Settings for BW EvaluationsFor evaluations using the SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW), you have to specify thetime specification types that your working time is composed of.

ProcedureMake the settings in Customizing for Project Management under Resource Management

Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server Set Time Zone of a BW Applicationwith WFD Server .

For more information, see the documentation in this IMG activity.

Page 247: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 247

Resource Settings for WFD ServerProcedureDefine the following settings in Customizing for Project Management under ResourceManagement Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server Business Settings forWFD server Resource Settings :

Service Areas

Job Functions and Levels

Availability Templates

Time Allocation Types

Time Allocations to Exclude from Overtime Calculation

Overtime Limit Profile

Capacity Limit Profile

For more information, see the documentation in this IMG activity.

Page 248: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

248 October 2012

Activating the Qualification Search and MatchupUsing WFM CoreProcedureIf you want to use WFM Core for the qualification search and matchup instead of the standardsystem, you must carry out the Activate Qualification Search and Matchup Using WFM Coreactivity in Customizing for Project Management under Resource Management QualificationManagement .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 249: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 249

Specifying Calculations for the Suitability Rate of aResourceIn Project Resource Planning, you can select resources according to their degree of suitability fora particular task or project role. In this activity, you specify calculations for determining thesuitability rate of a resource.

ProcedureCreate the calculations in Customizing for Project Management under Customer RelationshipManagement Workforce Deployment WFD Server Business Settings for WFD Server

Resource Settings Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) Business Add-In: Suitability of Resources byQualifications .

For more information, see the documentation for this IMG activity.

Page 250: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

250 October 2012

Configuring Groupware IntegrationGroupware integration enables data exchange between the CRM server and Groupwaresystems. CRM Middleware is enhanced with a framework that seamlessly integrates the CRMserver with Microsoft® Exchange or Lotus Domino Groupware servers.

PrerequisitesYou have:

Installed the Groupware server (either Microsoft Exchange 2000 or Lotus Domino 5.0.x).

Installed MapBox and the Groupware Connector.

Set MapStore settings for Workforce Management (WFM)-Groupware Integration (GWI).

For more information, choose the following path within the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.comunder mySAP Customer Relationship Management Architecture and Technology BusinessIntegration CRM Middleware Groupware Integration .

You have set up and checked the MapStore for WFM to Groupware Integration. For moreinformation, see Setting Up and Checking the Mapstore for WFM-GWI

ProcessHere is a general overview of the relationships between WFM Core, WFM Groupware Adapterand CRM Middleware:

Page 251: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 251

WFM Application 1

WFM Core

WFM GW Adapter

MapBox

CRM MW

Groupware (LD)

internal SyncPoint

Adapter for WFM Bdcos(R/3 Adapter)

Adapter for WFM Bdcos(WFM Adapter)

WFM Publisher

LD Connector

Groupware (MSX)

MSX Connector

WFM Application 2

Get additional data

Extractor for Initial Load

BDoc specific calls to changedata in GW / MapBox

InitialLoad

Select dataread andwrite

Triggers a change in GW

Publish ‘GWO has been changed‘

You perform the following types of customizing when configuring Groupware Integration:

CRM Middleware Customizing

WFM Core Customizing

Completing WFM IMG Customizing

ResultOnce completed, you are able to Loading Initial WFM Assignments to Groupware.

Page 252: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

252 October 2012

Setting Up and Checking the MapStore for WFM-GWIA series of load objects are required for Workforce Management (WFM) Groupware Integration(GWI). The function refers to these objects as WFM Extensible Stylesheet LanguageTransformations (XSLTs) during transformation.

After a successful download, you must restart the mapbox so that it can have access to theseXSLTs.

PrerequisitesYou must create subscriptions for the following publications:

Groupware Adapter Customizing (MESG)

Groupware Object Selection Filter Fields and Values (MESG)

Groupware Object master category list (MESG)

Groupware Adapter Metadata (by BDoc Type long name) (MESG)

Groupware Adapter Metadata for all BDoc Types (MESG)

Groupware Adapter - Generic Messages (by object) (MESG) (with value criterion ARBGB= GWA_APPLN_MSG).

For more information, see the following sections in the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.comunder:

SAP Customer Relationship Management Architecture and Technology BusinessIntegration CRM Middleware Groupware Integration Groupware Integration Setupand Load Guide Groupware Integration Configuration Activities GroupwareCustomizing Objects

SAP Customer Relationship Management Architecture and Technology BusinessIntegration CRM Middleware Groupware Integration Groupware Integration Setupand Load Guide Groupware Integration Configuration Activities Groupware ServerConfiguration Creating Subscriptions for the Groupware Adapter.

You must also ensure that:

Queue type ISP_D*, which processes inbound groupware messages to the groupwareadapter, is empty.

Queue type ISP_D* is registered under the Queue IN scheduler.

Queue type CRI* is registered under the Queue IN scheduler.

ActivitiesYou must download these objects to the MapStore:

GWA_ACTVCAT

GWA_ACTVCHAR

Page 253: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 253

GWA_ADDRCOMMAP

GWA_APPLN_MSG

GWA_BPROLES

GWA_BP_CUST

GWA_CATG_CUST

GWA_COUNTRY

GWA_CUSTPROP

GWA_CUST_LANGU

GWA_CUST_PERS3

GWA_CUST_PRIO

GWA_DATA

GWA_GWOMSTRCAT

GWA_GWO_SELRET

GWA_PROCTYPE

GWA_SITETYPE

GWA_STAREASON

GWA_STAT_CUST

You can display the object definitions using transaction R3AC3.

You trigger the initial download for these objects using transaction R3AS.

You can monitor the status of this initial load using transaction R3AM1 (with object name GWA*).

Once downloaded, review the object entries in the table MBMANDTSTORE. (You can useMBGROUP = 'CUSTOMIZING' to filter these objects and all Customizing objects.)

The transformation stores these objects under a different name in MBMANDTSTORE than that ofthe load objects. The following table lists these names against their load object names:

Object name in MBKEY field Load Object

GW_BPROLE_MAP GWA_BPROLES

GW_DATA_MAP GWA_DATA

GW_LANG_MAP GWA_CUST_LANGU

Page 254: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

254 October 2012

Object name in MBKEY field Load Object

GW_PROCTYPE_MAP GWA_PROCTYPE

GW_SITEID GWA_SITETYPE

GW_GWOMSTRCAT GWA_GWOMSTRCAT

GW_GWO_SELRET GWA_GWO_SELRET

GW_ADDRCOM_MAP GWA_ADDRCOMMAP

GW_STATUS_MAP GWA_STAT_CUST

GW_ACT_CAT_MAP GWA_ACTVCAT

GW_ACT_CHAR_MAP GWA_ACTVCHAR

GW_PRIORITY_MAP GWA_CUST_PRIO

GW_MSG GWA_APPLN_MSG

GW_PROP_MAP GWA_CUSTPROP

GW_DIALCODE_MAP GWA_COUNTRY

GW_COUNTRY_MAP GWA_COUNTRY

GW_DSTTIME_MAP GWA_COUNTRY

GW_DSTTIMEVAR_MAP GWA_COUNTRY

GW_TIMEZONE_MAP GWA_COUNTRY

GW_REGION_MAP_* GWA_COUNTRY

Depending on the region and language, the list can contain many GW_REGION_MAP MBKEYnames.

Review the list of MBKEY names against the list of objects. You must trigger the initial downloadfor the object if it is missing from this list.

Page 255: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 255

CRM Middleware CustomizingFollow these steps to complete the CRM Middleware customizing for Groupware integration.These steps are performed within the CRM system.

Refer to the documentation accompanying each customizing activity for detailed information onany particular step.

Procedure1. Define the logical system for the WFM system in Customizing under

CRM Middleware and Related Components Communication Setup Set Up LogicalSystems Define Logical System

The logical system is normally defined during system setup. If the WorkforceManagement system is not installed on the same system as the CRM Middleware, youhave to define a separate logical system for Workforce Management.

2. Define the RFC destination to connect the systems in Customizing under

Customer Relationship Management CRM Middleware and Related ComponentsCommunication Setup Set Up Logical Systems Define Logical System

You must define a separate RFC destination if the WFM Core is not installed on the CRMMiddleware system. For more information on the relationship between RFC destinationswithin the WFM Groupware Integration configuration, see RFC Destinations.

3. Define the WFM site in Customizing under

Customer Relationship Management CRM Middleware and Related ComponentsCommunication Setup Create Sites and Subscriptions

Create the site with the type Workforce Management. In the RFC Destination field inthe Maintenance of WFM Site Attributes pop-up window, enter:

o The RFC destination (if the WFM Core is not installed on the CRM Middlewaresystem).

o NONE to use the default internal RFC destination NONE if the WFM Core isinstalled on the CRM Middleware system.

4. To use SAP Workforce Management with SAP Groupware Integration, you must createthe following subscriptions:

1. Workforce Management to Groupware server:

1. In the subscription wizard, in the Publication field, enter WFMGroupware Integration (MESG).

2. Enter WFM as SOURCE value under Define WFM Site and assign therelevant site of type Groupware Adapter 01 (mBDoc) to thissubscription.

Page 256: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

256 October 2012

2. Groupware server to Workforce Management:

1. In the subscription wizard, in the Publication field, enter WFMGroupware Integration (MESG).

2. Enter GW as SOURCE value under Define WFM Site and assign therelevant site of type Workforce Management to this subscription.

3. Workforce Management user list and selection filter:

1. In the subscription wizard, in the Publication field, enter WFMGroupware Integration Customizing (MESG).

2. Assign the relevant site of type Groupware Adapter 01 (mBDoc) tothis subscription.

ResultYou have completed CRM Middleware customizing and you can see the three subscriptions onthe Administration Console Display Description page.

Page 257: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 257

RFC DestinationsDepending upon your implementation, RFCs are necessary to enable communication betweenthe following systems and adapters, per the table below:

RFC Calls From

D1 (green) WFM Core System CRM Middleware System

D2 (red) WFM Groupware Adapter WFM Publisher

D3 (blue) CRM Middleware System WFM Groupware Adapter

WFM-Publisher

GroupwareAdapter

WFM Core System /Groupware Adapter

CRM Middleware

D2 = 'NONE'

D3

D1

The above illustration shows a typical implementation in which the WFM Core System andGroupware Adapter are installed on separate systems from the CRM Middleware System.

Page 258: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

258 October 2012

WFM Core CustomizingFollow these steps to complete WFM Core customizing for Groupware Integration. These stepsare performed within the WFM system.

Refer to the documentation accompanying each customizing activity for detailed informationabout a particular step.

PrerequisitesYou have completed CRM Middleware customizing.

Procedure1. Define the logical system for the CRM Middleware system in Customizing under

Collaboration Projects Resource Management Workforce Deployment WorkforceDeployment Server Business Settings for WFD Server SAP HCM Integration

Define Logical System .

The above step is optional if the WFM Core system is installed on the CRM Middlewaresystem, as you have already performed this activity.

2. Define the RFC destination that the WFM Publisher uses to call the WFM GroupwareAdapter in Customizing under Collaboration Projects Resource Management

Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware IntegrationDefine RFC Destination .

You must define a separate RFC destination if the WFM Core is not installed on the samesystem as the WFM Publisher. For more information on the relationship between RFCdestinations within the WFM Groupware Integration configuration, see RFC Destinations[Page 257].

3. Define the RFC destination that the WFM Groupware Adapter uses to call the CRMMiddleware system in Customizing under Collaboration Projects ResourceManagement Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server WFMGroupware Integration Define RFC Destination .

You must define a separate RFC destination if the WFM Groupware Adapter is notinstalled on the same system as the CRM Middleware. For more information on therelationship between RFC destinations within the WFM Groupware Integrationconfiguration, see RFC Destinations [Page 257].

4. Define the Application System for the Groupware Adapter (GWADA) in Customizingunder

Collaboration Projects Resource Management Workforce Deployment WorkforceDeployment Server WFM Groupware Integration Define Application System .

Page 259: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 259

On the Application Systems Overview page for the Groupware Adapter, enter the logicalsystem for the WFM Core and the RFC destination that the WFM Publisher uses to callthe Groupware Adapter.

5. To receive changes made in the WFM Publisher, subscribe to two application systems forthe Groupware Adapter (GWADA) in Customizing under AP IMG CollaborationProjects Resource Management Workforce Deployment Workforce DeploymentServer WFM Event Handler Specify Event Handling for WFD Objects .

Make the following entries:

LogicalSystem

ApplicationCategory ofSubscriber

Function Module Subscription

CRM MW GWADA /SAPAPO/LRP_GWA_RES_MAINTAIN_S No genericsubscription

CRM MW GWADA /SAPAPO/LRP_GWA_WFMDATA_CONV_S No genericsubscription

ResultYou have completed the WFM Core customizing for Groupware Integration.

Page 260: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

260 October 2012

Completing WFD IMG CustomizingFollow these steps to complete the WFD IMG Customizing for Groupware Integration. Thesesteps are performed in the WFD system.

Refer to the documentation that accompanies each Customizing activity for detailed informationabout that particular step.

PrerequisitesYou have completed WFD Customizing for Groupware Integration.

Procedure1. Assign the RFC destination to CRM Middleware in Customizing for the WFD system

under Collaboration Projects Resource Management Workforce DeploymentWorkforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware Integration Assign RFC

Destination to CRM Middleware .

Enter the RFC destination into the WFM Groupware Adapter used to call CRMMiddleware. If the WFM system and CRM Middleware share a system, enter NONE to usethe default internal RFC destination NONE.

2. Register inbound queues for WFM Groupware integration in Customizing for the WFDsystem under Project Management Collaboration Projects Resource Management

Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware IntegrationRegister Inbound Queues for WFD Groupware Integration .

3. Specify the number range for categories for Groupware objects in Customizing for theWFD system under Collaboration Projects Resource Management WorkforceDeployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware Integration SpecifyNumber Range for Categories for WFD Groupware Objects .

4. Check settings for the data flow between Groupware and WFD in Customizing forPortfolio and Project Management under Project Management Collaboration Projects

Resource Management Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment ServerWFM Groupware Integration Check Settings for Data Flow Between Groupware and

WFD Server .

Do not change any settings on the Reaction to Data from Groupware page. You shouldsee the settings for the application categories CRMSV and PRP. If you do not see thesesettings, run the activity Register Inbound Queues for WFM Groupware Integration again.

5. Define time allocation types for transfer from Groupware to WFD in Customizing for theWFD system under Collaboration Projects Resource Management WorkforceDeployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware Integration DefineTime Allocation Types for Transfer from GW to WFD Server .

You define these settings in the specific project.

Page 261: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 261

6. Check the application category prefix for the Groupware Adapter in Customizing for theWFD system under Collaboration Projects Resource Management WorkforceDeployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware Integration CheckApplication Category Prefix for Groupware Adapter

Do not change any settings on the Mapping of Prefix to GWI Applications to ApplicationC page. You should see the following settings:

Application Category Prefix

CRMSV FSD

PRP PRP

If you do not see these settings, run the activity Register Inbound Queues for WFMGroupware Integration again.

7. Execute the report Transport Transfer Customizing to Groupware Server in Customizingfor the WFD system under Collaboration Projects Resource Management

Workforce Deployment Workforce Deployment Server WFM Groupware IntegrationTransport Transfer Customizing to Groupware Server .

You must start the report again whenever you change the customizing for the WFDsystem under WFM Groupware Integration Define Time Allocation Types for Transferfrom GW to WFD Server in order to transfer the customizing to the system.

ResultYou have completed the WFD IMG Customizing for Groupware Integration.

Page 262: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

262 October 2012

Loading Initial WFM Assignments to GroupwareUse this procedure to load the initial WFM assignments to Groupware.

PrerequisitesYou have completed all steps in configuring Groupware Integration.

Procedure1. In the CRM Middleware system, define the SAP ERP site for the WFM system in

Customizing under Customer Relationship Management CRM Middleware andRelated Components Communication Setup Create Sites and Subscriptions .

2. Maintain the tables CRMCONSUM and CRMRFCPAR using transaction SE16. Make thefollowing entries:

Table User Object Name Active RFC Destination LoadType

CRMCONSUM CRM WFM_GW_OBJECT <WFM Groupware used tocall CRM Middleware>

I(InitialLoad)

CRMRFCPAR CRM X

3. For more information, see the documentation available in Customizing under CustomerRelationship Management CRM Middleware and Related Components

Communication Setup Define ERP Backend Parameters .

4. You can do an initial download from the WFM Core via CRM Middleware to theGroupware. It is not possible to do an initial download from the Groupware (eitherMicrosoft® Exchange or Lotus Domino) to the CRM Middleware system.

5. For more information about the initial download, see the Setup and Download Guide onSAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/instguides under SAPBusiness Suite Applications SAP CRM SAP Enterprise Buyer 2.0 / SAP CRM 2.0C

SAP CRM: Server and OLTP Configuration Setup and Download Guide .

6. For more information on Groupware Integration, see the SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com under SAP Business Suite SAP Customer RelationshipManagement Architecture and Technology Business Integration CRM Middleware

Groupware Integration Groupware Integration Setup and Load Guide .

ResultYou have loaded the initial WFM assignments to Groupware.

Page 263: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 263

Distributed Content ServerSAP provides content servers (CS) as standard technology for storing files. Unlike the WebApplication Server (WAS) database, content servers are optimized for storing files.

Project Management is shipped with a predefined set of content categories (CFFCONTENT andCFFURL, see transaction OACT) and associated content repositories (CFF and CFFURL, seetransaction OAC0). Do not change these basic settings. This pair of settings enables all files tobe placed in the Project Management WAS database.

The Project Management document area is called CFF. Make changes or settings related to thisdocument area only.

Supported Scenarios for Content ServersThe following two scenarios are available in conjunction with content servers:

Scenario A: Files are stored in the database only (default configuration as shipped; runs"out of the box"); files are transported between the user's browser and the ProjectManagement WAS. This does not involve any content servers.

Scenario B: Files are stored on a single content server; files are transported between theuser's browser and the Project Management WAS, but stored on the CS. The contentserver is accessed through a different storage category. We recommend that you givethis category the name DPRMAIN or ZDPRMAIN, analogous to the cFolders Guide.

The advantage of scenario B in comparison to scenario A is that the WAS database is relieved ofthe file storage workload.

All the settings described below are relevant only if you use scenario B.

PrerequisitesIn order to use this function, you first have to install a content server. The installation of a contentserver on a particular server is described in the SAP Content Server Installation Guide (interfaceversion 0046; product versions 6.30 and 6.40 are both supported). You can find this guide onSAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/instguides under Installationand Upgrade Guides SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s) Installation 3-Installation-Standalone-Engines Installation-Content Server 6.40 on Unix or Installation-Content Server 6.40 on Windows.

ActivitiesCustomizing the Content Server in the Project Management WAS

Changing the Content Server Configuration

Page 264: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

264 October 2012

Customizing the Content Server in the ProjectManagement WASPrerequisitesThe hardware and basic content server software has been installed as described in the SAPContent Server Installation Guide (see Distributed Content Server).

ProcedureCreating a Content Server Entry

1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server Basis ServicesKnowledge Provider Content Management Service Define Content Repositories ,

choose Content Repository Display/Change .

2. Choose Content Repository Create .

3. Enter a name and a description for the content server.

4. Enter CFF in the Document Area field and HTTP in the Storage Type field.

All other settings are described in the standard SAP Content Server Installation Guide.

Creating a Storage Category for a Repository1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under Application Server Basis Services

Knowledge Provider Content Management Service Define Content Categories ,choose New entries.

2. Enter a name and description, and then enter CFF in the Document Area field.

3. Enter the name of the newly-created content repository in the Content Repository field.

Setting the new Content Server as the Default Storage Category1. Choose transaction DMWB.

2. Choose model area CFF in the tree.

3. Navigate to PHIO-classes, node CFF_VERSION_V.

4. Change the standard attribute STORAGE_CATEGORY from CFFCONTENT to thecategory you have defined above.

5. Repeat this for node CFF_ADD_FILES_V and for CFF_VERS in nodeCFF_VERSION_V.

Page 265: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 265

Changing the Content Server ConfigurationProcedureChanging Scenarios

1. In order to switch from scenario A to scenario B (see Distributed Content Server[External]), simply configure the content server as described under Customizing theContent Server in the Project Management WAS [Page 118]. The old documents thathave been stored in the Web Application Server (WAS) database are still valid; however,they are not automatically transferred to the content server.

2. Switching from scenario B to scenario A is only possible if the files are migrated from theCS to the database. The KPRO migration report RSIRPIRL allows files to be migratedbetween repositories for this purpose (regardless of whether it is a database repository ora CS repository).

Upgrading to a New Content ServerWhen an upgrade to a new content server is carried out, for example, because a certain contentserver is full, no data is lost. You can use the KPRO migration report RSIRPIRL, which allows youto transfer files from the current content server to the new one.

Page 266: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

266 October 2012

Setting Up Component-Specific Master DataPurposeThis section contains information about master data that has not been completely replicated.

This involves, for example:

Master data (for example, plant data in SAP APO) that was downloaded from theOnline Transaction Processing System (OLTP), but must be enhanced

Master data that must be newly created (for example, product catalog in SAP CRM,transportation relationships in SAP APO)

Master data must be newly created if the data was not downloaded from the OLTPsystem during replication, or if no OLTP system was used in the business scenario.

ProcedurePerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 267: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 267

Creating an Organizational StructureIf you use Resource Management, you can select resources according to their organizationalunits in the resource search function. Your enterprise must be mapped in an organizationalstructure.

In this activity, you create an organizational plan (organizational structure).

If you use Organizational Management in SAP HCM, you can transfer your organizational planfrom the HCM system to the Project Management system via ALE.

To do so, carry out the following activities:

· Defining Inbound Processing

· Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE to Project Management

· Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management

You can also choose to transfer your organizational structure from the HCM system via ALE andthen modify it in the Project Management system from the SAP menu. You should note, however,that if you transfer your organizational structure again in the future, your modifications will beoverwritten.

ProcedureCreate an organizational structure using transaction PPOCE.

Page 268: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

268 October 2012

Creating a Business PartnerIn Project Management, employees are represented as business partners in the role of Employeefor Resource Management.

You use this activity to manually create resources or organizations as business partners.

If you use SAP HCM, you can transfer your employees and their data from the HCM system tothe Project Management system using ALE.

To do so, carry out the following activities:

Defining Inbound Processing

Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE to Project Management

Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management

You also have the option of transferring employees (master data, organizational assignment, andqualifications profiles) from the HCM system using ALE and adding any missing businesspartners (such as external resources) in the Project Management system.

Procedure

You must first create a new business partner as a General Business Partner. Second, you assignthe new business partner to the Employee role. Only then will the business partner be available inProject Management.

If you are using HCM integration and want to define external resources as business partners too,use the Resource role instead of the Employee role.

1. In the SAP menu, choose Business Partner Maintain Business Partner .

2. Choose Create Person or Create Organization.

3. Enter data as required.

4. Save your data.

You can also create business partners in the application itself. However, this function isintended only for cases in which you want to assign a business partner in the applicationand you notice that the business partner has not yet been created in the system. Notethat you cannot enter all business partner data (for example, address, gender, or form ofaddress) if you do this. You have to complete the missing data later on in the above-mentioned activity in the SAP menu. Therefore, SAP recommends that you always createbusiness partners via the SAP menu or by transferring them using ALE.

Page 269: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 269

Creating Service Arrangements for a BusinessPartnerYou must create service arrangements for each resource to be able to search and assignresources in RPA. The service arrangement contains data relevant to selecting the right resource.In this procedure, you maintain data about qualifications and basic availability.

PrerequisitesYou have installed Workforce Deployment. You have created business partners.

Procedure1. Call transaction SE80.

2. Select the BSP Application CRM_BSP_FRAME.

3. Open the tree pages with flow logic.

4. Choose select.htm.

5. Execute with F8 ("EXECUTE/TEST").

6. The web browser is opened and you are requested to logon.

7. Enter your user ID and password, which is identical to the one for Project Management.

8. In the table entry COMM_SERV_PROVIDER, click on the context menu Blview=Null,Ver=0 New floor plan . This brings you to the BSP Application Business PartnersWFD.

9. Open Show Advanced Search.

10. In Partner ID, enter an asterisk (*) to select all required business partners and chooseSearch.

11. Select the tab page Service Arrangement and choose Add Entry.

12. Choose Save.

ResultService arrangements have been created for all business partners.

Page 270: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

270 October 2012

Transferring Availability Data of Business PartnersIn this procedure, you transfer availability data of business partners from HCM to WFD.

Procedure1. Start the report RPTWFMIF. This report creates time data as time specifications in WFD.

2. Enter NONE under RFC Destination for WFM Core to use the default internal RFCdestination NONE.

3. Set the Synchronous Update indicator.

4. To ensure that changes to the data are always updated in Project Management, schedulethe RPTWFMIF report. Make sure that the corresponding WFD resources exist.

Page 271: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 271

Buffering Availability Data of Business PartnersIn this procedure, you buffer availability data of business partners to improve the performance ofProject Management Staffing.

Procedure1. Start the report RPM_FES_AVAILABILITY. This report creates and stores the availability

data of resources for a specified time frame in the buffer table for faster access.

2. Enter Business Partner, Start Date, End Date, and Allocation Unit.

3. Execute the report.

Whenever the availability of a resource is changed, the report needs to be executed to buffer thelatest availability, otherwise the latest availability will not be shown in Project ManagementStaffing.

This report is not mandatory. If you do not want to use this performance improvement technique,you can use report RPM_FES_AVAILABILITY_DELETE to delete the buffer data.

Page 272: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

272 October 2012

Defining QualificationsWhen you use Resource Management, you can specify the qualifications required for a projectrole or a particular task.

Qualifications are used as selection criteria when you search for suitable resources.

You can define various proficiency levels for qualifications.

In this activity, you define the qualifications catalog and specify scales. You can also maintainbusiness partners' qualifications profiles.

If you use SAP HCM, you can transfer qualifications and qualifications profiles from the HCMsystem to the Project Management system via ALE.

To do so, carry out the following activities:

· Defining Inbound Processing [Page 198]

· Distributing the Qualifications Catalog via ALE to Project Management

· Distributing SAP HCM Master Data via ALE to Project Management

You can also choose to transfer qualifications from the HCM system via ALE and then modifythem in the Project Management system from the SAP menu.

You should note, however, that if you transfer qualifications again in the future, the qualificationscatalog and employees' qualifications profiles that you transfer will be overwritten, that is, yourmodifications will be lost.

ProcedureDefining a Qualifications Catalog and Scales

Define scales in Customizing for Project Management under Resource ManagementQualification Management Edit Scales .

Define your qualifications catalog in Customizing for Project Management underResource Management Qualification Management .

For more information, see the documentation for this activity.

Changing Qualifications ProfilesIn Customizing for Project Management, choose Resource Management QualificationManagement .

Page 273: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 273

Current SettingsPurposeThis section contains information about settings required during production operation.

This involves, for example:

Data replication

Business Customizing

As a rule, ABAP-based production systems are locked for Customizing. There are however,certain cases in which Customizing settings must be made in production systems, for example, tochange currency exchange rates. You can make these current settings in the menu in ABAP-based systems. This section also contains information about current settings that must be madein non-ABAP systems.

ProcedurePerform the steps in these guidelines in the sequence in which they appear.

Page 274: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

274 October 2012

Generating SAP LoadEach time you call the individual WebDynpro pages that make up SAP Portfolio and ProjectManagement for the first time, you may experience delays as the individual pages are generatedat runtime. To avoid this, we recommend that in the following cases, you generate each pageonce, centrally:

After you have installed SAP Portfolio and Project Management for the first time or afteran upgrade.

After importing Support Packages.

If you have added customer fields to SAP Portfolio and Project Management tables.

Procedure1. Use transaction SGEN to start the SAP Load Generator.

2. Select Generation of Webdynpros and then choose (Continue).

3. Select CPRXRPM for SAP Portfolio and Project Management and choose (Continue).

4. Confirm the default selection and choose (Continue).

5. Choose Start Job Directly to start the current generation directly, or Plan Job For to runthe generation later on.

For more information, see (Job Monitor).

Page 275: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 275

Extracting Evaluations for a ProjectYou can extract data from your projects with the program DPR_EVE_BATCH_DPO and displaythe evaluations in Project Management. You can either plan the extraction of the data or trigger itmanually.

You can use this program to update the project dashboards on a regular basis.

ProcedureRegular Execution as a Background Job

1. In the SAP menu, choose Project Management Evaluations Extract ProjectEvaluations . Then define a variant for the program DPR_EVE_BATCH_DPO.

If you want to update the project dashboards on a regular basis, check the setting UseCustomizing in your variant. For more information on the dashboard, see SAP Notes900310 and 976789.

2. Plan a regular execution, for example, every night, for this variant of the program. Thetransactions you will need are available in the SAP menu under Tools CCMS Jobs

.

Manual Start1. In the SAP menu, choose Project Management Evaluations Extract Project

Evaluations .

2. Enter the selection criteria.

3. Choose Program Execute in Background .

Page 276: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

276 October 2012

Granting Administration Authorization for an ObjectThere is always at least one person assigned to an object in Project Management withadministration authorization for this object. However, it is possible that the person withauthorization is not available due to illness, for example, and the administrative tasks need to betransferred to another person. In such cases, you can enter new administrators for a particularobject in Project Management. You have two options for this:

Assigning authorizations as a system administrator

Assigning authorizations as a superuser

In both cases you bypass the authorization concept for Project Management. Therefore, usethese forms of authorization only for emergencies.

PrerequisitesAssigning Authorizations as a System Administrator

Configure the SMTP service for sending e-mails in transaction SCOT.

1. Enter the connection data.

2. Activate the SMTP service by setting the Node in Use indicator.

For more information about this application, choose Help Application Help withinthe transaction.

You require authorizations for the following authorization objects:

o S_USER_GRP with the following values:

Activity: 03 (Display)

User group in user master maintenance*:

As a rule, one of your administrators with the role SAP_CPR_USER willalready have this authorization. If this is not the case, assign this role toan administrator.

Do not include the authorization object ACO_OTYPE in the roleSAP_CPR_USER, as all Project Management users have this role andwould thus have the authorization to add new administrators.

o ACO_OTYPE with activity 01 (Add or Generate) and authorization for the objectcategory you want to change (Project Management: Project or User Group).

To grant a user authorization, create a new role and assign the authorizationobject ACO_OTYPE to it. Then assign the new role to the administrator.

You can check the authorizations in transaction PFCG.

Page 277: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 277

Assigning Authorizations as a SuperuserTo have superuser authorization, in your user master you must have a role or a profile thatassigns the authorizations to the authorization object ACO_SUPER for the activity ADMIN.

ProcedureAssigning Authorizations as a System Administrator

1. Open SAP Portfolio and Project Management and navigate to the Portfolio and ProjectAdministration screen.

2. Call the application using the link Project Authorization Administration.

3. Enter the required data and choose Create Authorization.

The system creates the new administration authorization. Since this process is anexception to the normal process, the system sends an e-mail stating that a newauthorization holder was created to all persons with administration authorization for thisobject.

Assigning Authorizations as a SuperuserAs a superuser, you can give administration authorization in Project Management on theAuthorizations tab page to the user who will take over managing the project. No e-mails are sent.

For more information on granting authorizations, see the help for Project Management underAuthorizations.

Page 278: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

278 October 2012

Replicating Data for Accounting IntegrationIf you use the accounting integration functions and you create new cost or revenue rates within aproject for costing, or if you create new project types or project reasons, you must replicate thesein the connected accounting system so that they are recognized there.

ProcedureCarry out replication in Customizing for SAP Portfolio and Project Management under ProjectManagement Connection to External Systems Accounting Integration:

Replicate Cost/Revenue Rates (mandatory)

Replicate Accounting-Relevant Characteristics (optional)

For more information, see the documentation for the respective IMG activities.

Page 279: Config Guide Contppm50sp09_smcsp35

SAP Portfolio and Project Management: Configuration

October 2012 279

ArchivingYou can archive the following objects in Project Management:

Projects

When archiving projects, you can choose whether you want to archive operationalprojects or project versions. If you archive operational projects for which project versionsexist, then depending on the version, these are either also archived or deleted withoutbeing archived. For more information, see the help for Project Management underDeletion of Project Versions.

Project templates

Checklist templates

Control plan templates

Procedure1. Call transaction SARA.

2. Enter the archiving object CPROJECTS as the object name.

3. Carry out archiving.

4. Start the delete operation.

For more information about this application, use transaction SARA and choose HelpApplication Help.